Accessible design of user interface elements


Published by BFIT-Bund AG02 Software

Authors: Andreas Englisch and Carola Meixner, Deutsche Telekom MMS GmbH (External Link) on behalf of the IT-Systemhauses der Bundesagentur für Arbeit (External Link)

Contact persons IT-Systemhaus der Bundesagentur für Arbeit: Markus Brand and Michael Zetzsche

Distributor: Überwachungsstelle des Bundes für Barrierefreiheit von Informationstechnik (External Link), AG02 Software applications

You can also download this guide as PDF (Opens PDF document)

Version: 1.0

Table of contents

Foreword

Online betrachten

According to the objectives of the “Accessible Information Technology Ordinance” (BITV 2.0), modern information and communications technology should be designed so that, as far as possible and as a general rule, it is accessible without any restriction.

There is considerable ambiguity as regards the implementation, as the existing specifications leave a lot of scope for interpretation.

These discrepancies frequently lead to differing interpretations of the existing specifications, and in the event of the acceptance of artifacts or entire ICT systems, to annoyance, and in some cases, legal disputes.

The authors of this document have taken on the task of closing this gap between the legal requirements, guidelines, standards and existing design guides or style guides – also from software manufacturers.

The visual user interface elements described in DIN EN ISO 9241-161 have been considered for this purpose, supplemented by additional elements and extended with regard to the accessibility requirements in accordance with EN 301 549 v3.2.1. Requirements have been defined for each UI element in terms of presentation, operation and programming/interfaces.

This reference guide serves as a supplement to DIN EN ISO 9241-161 and as an aid for the implementation of EN 301 549 v3.2.1, and is not intended to replace the currently valid legal requirements or guidelines. On the contrary, this collection is based on and subject to a corresponding update process.

Table of contents

Goals and target group

Online betrachten

This document attempts to fill the following gaps in the accessibility publications:

The document is primarily aimed at software developers.

Other roles in the field of software development for which the document may be helpful include

Scope of validity

Online betrachten

Scope of validity

This document describes the accessibility requirements for Web and Desktop software as well as hybrid applications (which combine Web and Desktop technologies) which operate on the Microsoft Windows platform software and which have an open functionality. The requirements are primarily derived from EN 301 549 (version 3.2.1, sections 9 and 11).

This document does not initially apply to the following software:

In addition, this document does not apply to:

Many of the requirements described here can be transferred to software from other platforms.

Notes for the reader

Online betrachten

Layout of the document

The document is divided into the following sections:

Each section contains several areas, “control elements”, for example, is divided into one section for each specific control element.

The individual sub-sections are divided into:

The requirements are presented in table form:

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
Unique requirement numberTopic-related classification of the requirementRequirement to be met, supplemented with explanatory notes if necessaryRelevance of the requirement (see Classification of the requirements))Origin of the requirement (see References)

Note: The validity of the requirements is specified as follows:

Classification of the requirements

The requirements are classified as follows:

ClassificationMeaningReferenceFormulation
MustLegal requirement according to BITV 2.0

Minimum requirements that must be met to achieve compliance with BITV 2.0
EN 301 549, Version 3.2.1 (External Link)

Note: All the requirements of EN 301 549, sections 11.1 to 11.4, refer to the WCAG 2.1. The numbering of the corresponding requirements from EN 301 549 corresponds to the numbering in the WCAG 2.1.

  • Must

  • May not

ShouldKey requirements that should be met

According to Section 3 (4) of BITV 2.0, efforts should be made to comply with the requirements for certain areas of application: “For central navigation and entry offers, as well as for offers that enable user interaction such as forms and the completion of authentication, identification and payment processes, efforts should be made to achieve the highest possible level of accessibility.”
  • WCAG (External Link) 2.1, AAA criteria

  • WCAG 2.1, A- and AA-criteria that are not a component of section 11 of EN 301 549

  • WCAG 2.2 criteria

  • Other W3C specifications

  • Other ISO norms

  • Further standards of the DIN EN ISO 9241 series (suitability for use) with special relevance to accessibility

  • should

  • should not

Implementation recommendations, notes
  • Note

  • Can

  • Recommended

The specific requirements concerning the use of the keyboard, i.e. which keys are to be used for which purpose, are classified as follows:

ClassificationMeaning
RequiredMinimum requirements
If these requirements cannot be met, the alternate use of the keyboard should be documented.
RecommendedRecommended requirements
The fulfillment of these requirements serves the purpose of easier and more efficient operations with the keyboard.

Note: The requirements regarding the use of the keyboard cannot be classified as “must” or “should”, as EN 301 549 only requires the possibility for the use of the keyboard, but does not define specific keys, as these depend on the respective platform, for example. The elementary guide also contains notes, recommendations and practical tips. These are not standardized. In the notes, recommendations and practical tips, however, “must”, “may not”, “should” and “should not” are used insofar as reference is made to a requirement.

Coverage of the requirements

The sections on general topics (“application-related requirements” and “element-spanning requirements”) address the dialog-related requirements of EN 301 549 (in particular, section 9 on Web and 11 on Software). The requirements are explained here in general (i.e. not in relation to specific UI elements) and in as much detail as possible (i.e. with possible special cases, exceptions, etc.).

In the sections on individual UI elements (text, graphic, structure, control elements), only the relevant requirements regarding the respective UI element are listed. This article describes what a general requirement means as regards a specific element. However, the requirements are not necessarily explained in detail; i.e. for special cases and exceptions, reference is made to the respective general section.

For example:

Coverage of the elements

The following elements are not described in this document due to their limited degree of relevance to software:

However, there is the intention to include these requirements and elements in a future version of the document.

Technology-specific features

Some programming languages or frameworks do not allow all the requirements to be met due to limitations to the respective technology. In this case, it should be checked as to whether another programming language or another framework can be used. Alternatively, the requirements should be met as sufficiently as possible. All deviations should be documented in the help and in the accessibility declaration.

This document does not address technology-specific features, but focuses on the expected behavior of the UI elements.

Online betrachten

Conforming alternate version

Online betrachten

If the application fails to meet all the accessibility requirements, a conforming alternate version can be made available. In this respect, however, the following requirements must be met:

It is recommended that only one version of the application is offered at a time and that it is designed so that it is accessible.

Note 1: A typical use case for a conforming alternate version is when the standard version of the Web application does not meet the contrast requirements for content consisting of text or graphics due to the corporate design. In this case, the conforming alternate version can use a CSS marking that provides for sufficient contrast.

Note 2: For selected Web applications that are already largely accessible, an overlay tool may be able to generate a conforming alternate version that fully meets the above requirements. However, this is usually not the case, especially if the Web application has problems that cannot be found and fixed automatically. Therefore, an overlay tool cannot be used as a standard to provide a conforming alternate version ( Monitoring Center of the German Federal Government for the Accessibility of Information Technology - Publications - Joint Assessment of the Monitoring Centers of the Federal Government and Federal States for the Accessibility of Information Technology on the use of Overlay Tools (bfit-bund.de) (External Link))

Note 3: For desktop applications, EN 301 549 does not make any statements about alternative versions. However, it may be assumed that the same requirements apply to desktop applications.

Application language and change of language

Online betrachten

Synonyme: Language

See also: labels, description, text, font

Foreign-language content can be difficult for disabled people to understand. This is especially the case if such content is output by the text-to-speech software with the incorrect pronunciation.

Presentation

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
1Foreign-language contentThe content should be displayed in the language of the user.

Note 1: This does not apply to technical terms in foreign languages as long as it may be assumed that the users can understand them.

Note 2: If the application is used by users who are from different language areas, the application should offer the possibility for changing the language. All content should then be displayed in the selected language.

SollEN 301 549:
11.2.4.6

Programming/interfaces

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
2Application languageThe application language must be communicated to the Accessibility API

Note 1: In the case of Desktop software, the application language can also be communicated to the Accessibility API through the platform.

Note 2: With Web applications, the language must be communicated using the lang attribute on theelement.

MustEN 301 549:
11.3.1.1.1
3Web: Foreign-language contentThe change of language within the application must be communicated to the Accessibility API.

Note 1: This does not apply to

  • Proper names,

  • technical terms,

  • Words included in the vocabulary of the application language, and

  • Words whose language cannot be determined.

Note 2: In HTML, the marking of the change of language takes place with the lang attribute.

ShouldWCAG 2.1: 3.1.2 (AA)
4Desktop: Foreign-language contentIf the language of the foreign-language content can be programmatically communicated, this should take place.

Note: This is possible in hybrid applications that use Web

ShouldWCAG 2.1: 3.1.2 (AA)

Error prevention and correction

Online betrachten

Synonyms: Error message, error messages, input instructions, context-specific help

See also: Required field labeling,, description, help and support,, authentication, form

Error messages inform users about incorrect entries or incorrect operations. Error messages help with the correction of errors. Error messages can be displayed

Input instructions help users to avoid errors. These can be displayed

Presentation

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
5Error messageIf an error occurs, the incorrect form element must be identified and the cause of the error described in text formMustEN 301 549:
9.3.3.1,
11.3.3.1.1
6Error messageThe Submit button may not be disabled as long as the form is incomplete or filled out incorrectly. @ Note: This does not apply if there is an alternative method for displaying the error messages. -@MustEN 301 549:
9.3.3.1,
11.3.3.1.1
7Error messageThe error message must be permanently displayed.

This does not apply if the error has been fixed. For further exceptions, see time limits.

MustEN 301 549:
9.2.2.1,
11.2.2.1
8Error preventionForm elements must have an expressive label so that their purpose is identifiable.MustEN 301 549:
9.2.4.6, 11.2.4.6, 9.3.3.2, 11.3.3.2
9Error preventionIf the expected form field inputs cannot be derived clearly from the label of the form fields, additional input instructions must be provided (also see Beschreibungen).

Note: Examples of input instructions include:

MustEN 301 549:
9.3.3.2, 11.3.3.2
10Error preventionIf, when submitting a form,
  • a legal or financial commitment is made (e.g. when a contract is concluded),

  • user-managed data in a database is changed or erased, or

  • solutions are communicated in the context of an examination,

one of the following error prevention options must be offered:
  • The submission of the form can be undone.

  • The data is checked by the application for its accuracy, and users can subsequently correct any errors.

  • Users are asked to check their data for its accuracy and to correct incorrect inputs.

MustEN 301 549:
9.3.3.4, 11.3.3.4
11Error preventionWhen submitting information, one of the following error prevention options must be offered:
  • The submission of the form can be undone.

  • The data is checked by the application for its accuracy and the users can subsequently correct any errors.

  • The users are asked to check their data for its accuracy and are able to correct incorrect inputs.

ShouldWCAG 2.1: 3.3.6 (AAA)
12Error preventionA context-sensitive Help option should be offered.ShouldWCAG 2.1: 3.3.5 (AAA)
13Error preventionIf it is necessary to enter information (such as a user name and password) when logging in, a variant must be available so that users do not have to remember this information.

Note: The software can save the login data and enable the addition of the information from the clipboard or using a password manager.

ShouldWCAG 2.2
14Error preventionIf it is necessary to input data in a process several times, then such data should be filled in automatically after the first input or be made available for selection.

Note 1: This also applies to information that may potentially be different, such as delivery and billing addresses. After inputting the delivery address, users can be given the opportunity to accept the information for the billing address automatically instead of having to enter it again.

Note 2: This does not apply if inputting the data again is an essential requirement, is necessary for security reasons, or the data is no longer valid.

ShouldWCAG 2.2
15Error correctionIf the application is able to find suggestions for corrections to an incorrect input, these suggestions must be displayed.

Note: This does not apply if it presents a risk to the security or the purpose of the application, in authentication processes, for example.

MustEN 301 549:
9.3.3.3, 11.3.3.3
16Error correctionIf an automatic error correction takes place, an error message in text form must be displayed.MustEN 301 549:
9.3.3.1, 11.3.3.1.1

Programming/interfaces

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
17UpdateIf the error message is displayed as a status message , it must be marked so that the assistive technology is able to output it automatically.

Note: If the error message is automatically focused, it is not considered a status message.

MustEN 301 549: 9.4.3.1, 11.4.1.3.1
18Error messageError messages on the form field must be linked to the form field in such a way that they are communicated to the Accessibility API.

Note: If the Accessibility API you use does not allow error messages to be communicated with a form field, the error messages must be sent as part of the Accessible Name oder der Accessible Description . In this case, the Accessible Description should preferably be used, so that the Accessible Name is not excessively long.

MustEN 301 549:
9.1.3.1, 11.1.3.1
19Error preventionInput instructions which are visually assigned to a form field must be programmatically associated with the form field as input instructions.

Note: If the Accessibility API you use does not allow for the communication of input instructions, the error messages must be communicated as part of the Accessible Name or the Accessible Description. In this case, the Accessible Description should preferably be used, so that the Accessible Name is not excessively long.

MustEN 301 549: 11.1.3.1
20Error preventionIf the technology used is able to identify the input purpose of form fields, the purpose of the form fields must be marked for the data of the respective users (e.g. surname, date of birth, place of residence) according to https://www.w3.org/TR/WCAG21/#input-purposes.MustEN 301 549:
9.1.3.5, 11.1.3.5.1
21StatusIf it is only the case that a visual, non-textual error indicator is displayed on the incorrect field, then the error status must be communicated to the Accessibility API.

Note: Depending on the technology, the error status may only mean “incorrect” or be communicated in a more differentiated way (with respect to the criticality, for example, as a “note”, a “warning” or an “error”, or with respect to the error type during a spell check, for example, as “spelling”, “grammar” and “expression”).

MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2

Help and support

Online betrachten

Synonyms: Manual, documentation, support, help

See also: description, error messages

Presentation

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
22Accessibility featuresThe Help option must identify all the accessibility features of the application and explain how to use them.

Note: The Help option should describe which accessibility features are available, what they are intended for, what they are effective for and how they can be enabled

MustEN 301 549:
12.1.1
23Accessibility featuresThe Support must be able to name the accessibility features documented in the Help and explain how to use them.MustEN 301 549:
12.2.2
24Help dokumentsThe Help documents must be provided in at least one digital, accessible format.

Note 1: If the Help is offered as an accessible Web document, all the requirements in section 9 of EN 301 549 must be taken into account. If the Help is offered as an accessible non-Web document, all the requirements in section 10 of EN 301 549 must be taken into account.

Note 2: This also applies to Help documents that cannot be accessed from within the application but are made available by Support, for example..

MustEN 301 549:
12.1.2, 12.2.4
25SupportThe Support must take account of the communication needs of people with disabilities, either directly or through a mediator.

Note: In this context, the provision of telephone support alone may be considered insufficient, as it is not accessible to people with hearing impairments (2 senses principle).

MustEN 301 549:
12.2.3
26Reference to sensory propertiesInformation in the Help option which relates to the application must not refer exclusively to sensory properties.

Note: Therefore, for example, a button in the application should not be described by its appearance or position, but by its label.

MustEN 301 549:
9.1.3.3,
10.1.3.3,
11.1.3.3
27Error preventionA context-sensitive Help option should be offered.ShouldWCAG 2.1: 3.3.5 (AAA)
28ConsistencyIf the application has a Help or Support option, this can be found in the same location throughout the applicataion.

Note: If the application has multiple Help or Support options, it is considered sufficient when one of these meets the requirement.

ShouldWCAG 2.2

Operation

Use the keyboard: Help

ActionKeyClassification
Desktop: Initialize HelpF1Required
Initialize context-specific HelpSHIFT+F1Recommended

Resizing

Online betrachten

Synonyme: Scaling, adjusting the font size, zoom

See also: font, text

The following requirements should ensure that the font size can be adjusted to the user preferences without assistive technology.

Presentation

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
29ResizingIt must be possible to resize the text of the application by up to 200% without the use of assistive technology. The resizing may not lead to a loss of content or functionality.

Note 1: To do this in desktop applications, the application can offer its own zoom function or support the font size adjustment of the operating system (Settings > System > Display > Scale and layout: advanced scaling settings).

Note 2: For Web applications, the zoom function of the browser should be supported.

Note 3: For superior perceptibility, it should also be possible to resize non-text content.

MussEN 301 549:
9.1.4.4, 11.1.4.4.1
30ResizingIn the case of a screen size with a width of 320 px and a height of 256 px, no loss of content or function may occur. It should only be necessary to scroll content in either the vertical or horizontal direction, and not in both directions. Two-dimensional scrolling is only permitted with elements that are invariably two-dimensional (such as graphics, maps, videos or tables)

Note 1: This requirement should ensure that the content can be resized by up to 400%.

Note 2: When using a zoom ratio of 400%, all the content must be scaled accordingly. This does not apply to content that is already sufficiently large, such as headings. It must be possible to resize these by at least 200%.

Note 3: If text is placed within two-dimensional content, such as tables, a single block of text (in a table cell, for example) must be readable without the need for two-dimensional scrolling.

MustEN 301 549:
9.1.4.10, 11.1.4.10

Accessibility API

Online betrachten

Synonyms: Accessibility interface, interoperability with assistive technology, compatibility with assistive technology, platform support for accessibility services for assistive technology, programming interface for assistive technology

See also: Element status, changes of context, contrast adjustment

Assistive technology such as screen readers, screen magnifiers, Windows Contrast Adjustment and voice input software do not generally interact directly with the software or the browser, but using an interface for the accessibility which is made available by the operating system, for example: the Accessibility API (Application Programming Interface). The software and/or browser sends all the relevant information to the Accessibility API in standardized form, and the assistive technology accesses the information which is made available in the Accessibility API. However, the assistive technology only uses the information from the Accessibility API, which is relevant based on the needs of the user. If applications are operated using assistive technology, to a certain extent the operation does not take place directly, but is also conveyed using the Accessibility API.

The best-known Accessibility APIs on Microsoft Windows are:

Windows applications should use the current Accessibility API UIA.

Software which does not use the Accessibility API of the operating system can implement its own interfaces for the communication of information to the assistive technology. In this context, Java applications use the Java Accessibility API (JAAPI).

The following information, for example, is communicated by the software and/or the browser to the Accessibility API and read out by the assistive technology if required:

Please note:

Programming/interfaces

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
31Desktop: GeneralApplications must use the existing Accessibility APIs of the operating system, insofar as the requirements in this table can be met with their use. If the Accessibility API is not sufficient to meet the following requirements, other methods must be used.MustEN 301 549:
11.5.2.3
32SyntaxApplications which use a markup language, and with which the Accessibility API or the assistive technology are able to access the markup language, must comply with the following rules regarding the marking:
  • Elements have full start and end tags,

  • Elements are correctly nested according to their specification,

  • Elements have no duplicate attributes,

  • The same IDs are not used more than once.

Note: This does not apply if the markup language allows for deviations from these rules.

MustEN 301 549:
9.4.1.1, 11.4.1.1.1
33RoleThe role of the elements must be communicated to the Accessibility API.

Note: The role of the elements may not be changed during operation.

MustEN 301 549:
9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5
34StatusThe status of the elements must be communicated correctly to the Accessibility API (see also Element status and Operability status).MustEN 301 549:
9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5
35ValueThe value of the elements must be communicated to the Accessibility API. In the case of elements that have a defined range of values, the minimum and maximum values must also be communicated to the Accessibility API.MustEN 301 549:
9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.7
36OrientationIf the orientation of the element has an influence on the operation, the orientation must be communicated to the Accessibility API.

Note: Horizontally oriented elements can be operated with the RIGHT/LEFT ARROW, vertically oriented elements can be operated with the UP/DOWN ARROW, for example.

MustEN 301 549:
9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2
37NameThe name and description of the elements must be communicated to the Accessibility API as the Accessible Name and Accessible Description.MustEN 301 549:
9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5, 11.5.2.8
38Keyboard shortcut, shortcut keyIf the element has a visually perceptible keyboard shortcut or a visually perceptible shortcut key, these must be communicated to the Accessibility API.MustEN 301 549:
9.1.3.1, 11.1.3.1
39Desktop: Element hierarchyThe parent / child relationships of the elements must be communicated to the Accessibility API.

Note: Among others, this allows the assistive technology to correctly output the following information:

  • The amount of sibling elements (e.g. list entries in a selection list),

  • The position of the element within the parent element (e.g. a list entry in a selection list),

  • Parent group label (e.g. in the case of a radio button group),

  • Nesting level (e.g. in the case of tree structures).

MustEN 301 549:
11.5.2.9
40Web: Element hierarchyThe elements must be marked so that the browser is able to communicate the parent / child relationships of the elements to the Accessibility API correctly.

Note: This can be achieved with the following methods:

  • correct nesting of elements according to the HTML specification,

  • correct nesting of the ARIA roles according to the ARIA specification,

  • use of corresponding ARIA attributes (such as aria-owns).

MustEN 301 549:
9.1.3.1, 11.1.3.1
41Desktop: OperationAll the control options of the element must be communicated to the Accessibility API.MustEN 301 549:
11.5.2.11
42Web: OperationThe control options of the element must correspond to the role used.

Note: Different or additional operating options should be documented in the application and the Help option.

MustEN 301 549:
9.4.1.2
43OperationIt must be possible to implement all the control options of the element with the assistive technology.

Note 1: This applies, for example, to the enabling of elements, value and status changes, as well as changes of position for the focus and text cursor.

Note 2: This does not apply to security-related applications for intelligence or military services, or to encryption software for the purposes of national security.

MustEN 301 549:
9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.12, 11.5.2.14, 11.5.2.16, 11.5.2.17
44UpdateIf an element characteristic which has been communicated to the Accessibility API is updated, this update must also be communicated to the Accessibility API.MustEN 301 549:
9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.15
45UpdateIn applications, Status messages must be marked so that they are output by the assistive technology without receiving the focus.MustEN 301 549:
9.4.1.3, 11.4.1.3.1
46Desktop: PositionThe spatial size and position of the elements must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Fokusindikator).MustEN 301 549:
11.5.2.5, 11.5.2.10
47PositionThe focused element, the position of the text cursor and the selected entry within an element must be communicated to the Accessibility API.MustEN 301 549:
9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.13

Practical tip: Accessibility API with desktop applications

The default elements of the platform software or the framework used typically communicate the correct information to the Accessibility API automatically. They should therefore be used with preference.

Example 1:

Figure 1: Information of the Accessibility API and its use by the screen reader JAWS

If custom elements are used, attention should be paid to the following in particular:

If a custom element is implemented, it is often recommended that a related default element is used and customized accordingly, as it is then possible to use the basic functionality of the default element.

The corresponding characteristics of the Accessibility API should be used for the communication of the information. If there is no corresponding characteristic for sending the information in the Accessibility API or if the framework used does not support this characteristic, the information must be communicated in text form (i.e., as part of the Accessible Name or the Accessible Description).

For example: Disabled elements

For example: Button with value

The communication of information about the corresponding characteristics of the Accessibility API is always to be preferred over the communication of such information in text form (as part of Accessible Name or the Accessible Description) for the following reasons:

None of this is possible if the information is only communicated in text form.

Example 2: The following figure shows three buttons with the label “Submit”, “Check” and “Delete”.

Figure 2: Three buttons, two of which are shown as disabled.

The following figure shows the same buttons from the previous figure, but when using Windows Contrast Adjustment (Contrast no. 1).

Figure 3: The three buttons from the previous figure when using Windows Contrast Adjustment.

The following figure shows the acoustic screen reader output of the three buttons from the previous figure (with the example of the JAWS element overview).

Figure 4: Screen reader output of the three buttons from the previous figure.

In the three following figures, the output of the three buttons from the preceding figures is shown on the Braille line (with the example of JAWS).

Figure 5: Braille output of the three buttons from the previous figures.

Authentication

Online betrachten

Synonyme: Sign in, sign out, login, logout

See also: Changes of context, time limits, password input field

The authentication encompasses the processes of signing in and out of an application or within an application. Logging in may be required to be able to use an application or certain parts of the application.

Note: Requirements regarding the authentication control elements (such as input fields, password input fields and buttons) are described for the respective element.

Presentation and operation

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
48CaptchaIf a Captcha is used during the authentication, appropriate Captchas with at least two different sensory systems must be offered for different disabilities.

Note 1: For hearing-impaired people, a visual Captcha can be offered, and for blind people, an audio Captcha can be offered.

Note 2: The use of Captchas which require users to solve a task should be avoided as far as possible.

Note 3: If a Captcha cannot be dispensed with, a non-sensory Captcha (such as one with a general knowledge question or a math task) should also be offered.

MustEN 301 549:
9.1.1.1, 11.1.1.1
49LogoutIf an automatic logout takes place in the application after a certain time, it must be possible for this time limit
  • to be disabled in advance, or

  • to be adjusted in advance (extendible to at least 10-times the time); or

  • to be extendible to at least 10 times the time with a simple action at least 20 seconds before expiry.

Note: This does not apply to an automatic logout which takes place after at least 20 hours.
MustEN 301 549:
9.2.2.1, 11.2.2.1
50LogoutNo automatic logout should take place in the application.ShouldWCAG 2.1: 2.2.3 (AAA)
51LogoutIf an automatic logout takes place, it should be possible to continue working without a loss of data after logging in again.ShouldWCAG 2.1: 2.2.5 (AAA)
52LogoutUsers should be informed in advance of the time at which an automatic logout takes place if the logout can lead to a loss of data.

Note: This does not apply to a logout after more than 20 hours.

ShouldWCAG 2.1: 2.2.6 (AAA)
53LoginIf a certain form of biometric data is required for the login (e.g. fingerprint, facial recognition), an alternative login method must be made available.

Note: The alternative login method may also be based on biometric data provided that a different form of biometric data is used for this.

MustEN 301 549:
5.3
54LoginIf the login takes place with the movement of the device or the user, an alternative login method must be provided.

Note: The movement of the device or the user may be necessary to enter biometric data (e.g. fingerprint, facial recognition), for example.

MustEN 301 549:
9.2.5.4, 11.2.5.4
55LoginIf it is necessary to enter information (such as a user name and password) when logging in, a variant must be available for which users do not have to remember this information.

Note: The application can save the login data and/or enable the addition of the information from the clipboard or using a password manager.

ShouldWCAG 2.2: 3.3.7 (A)

Programming/interfaces

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
56StatusIf the technology used is able identify the input purpose of form fields, the purpose of the form fields must be marked for the data of the respective users (such as the name, email address, password) according to Input Purposes for User Interface Components - Web Content Accessibility Guidelines (WCAG) 2.1 (w3.org) (External Link)

Note: This does not mean the role (e.g. “input field”) or the specific label (e.g. “user name”), but a defined input purpose (e.g. “first name”, “user name”, “new password” or “current password”).

MustEN 301 549: 9.1.3.5, 11.1.3.5.1

Animations

Online betrachten

Synonyms: Sparkling, flashing, updates, flash

See also Time limits, carousel, Video, progress bar

Animations are:

Examples of automatic visual changes:

Examples of unexpected visual changes when using the application are:

Presentation

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
57StatusContent which flashes for more than 3 times per second and exceeds a certain flash threshold (siehe General flash and red flash thresholds - Web Content Accessibility Guidelines (WCAG) 2.1 (w3.org) (External Link)), must be avoided.MustEN 301 549:
9.2.3.1, 11.2.3.1
58FlashingContent which flashes for more than 3 times per second should be avoided.ShouldWCAG 2.1.: 2.3.2 (AAA)
59AnimationIf the application contains content that automatically moves, scrolls or flashes, and if this animation lasts longer than 5 seconds and is displayed along with other content, it must be possible for the animation to be paused, stopped, or hidden.

Note: Avoiding the use of automatically moving, scrolling or flashing content is recommended.

MustEN 301 549: 9.2.2.2, 11.2.2.2
60AnimationIf moving animations are displayed during the operation of the application, a mechanism should be available to disable them.

Note: The mechanism for disabling moving animations can be implemented in the application. Alternatively, the user preference in the operating system should be taken into consideration (Control panel > Ease of Access Center > Make the computer easier to use > Turn off all unnecessary animations).

MustEN 301 549: 9.2.2.2, 11.2.2.2
61UpdateIf the application contains content which is updated automatically and displayed along with other content, the update must be paused and/or stopped, or it must be possible to determine the frequency of the update and/or to hide the area with the automatically updated content.

Note: Avoiding the use of automatically updating content is recommended.

MustEN 301 549: 9.2.2.2, 11.2.2.2

Programming/interfaces

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
62Alternative textIf information is communicated using the animation, this information must also be communicated in text form.

Note: Additional requirements apply to videos.

MustEN 301 549:
9.1.1.1, 11.1.1.1
63Reference to sensory propertiesInformation which serves the understanding or the operation of the application may not make exclusive reference to the animation of the described elements.MustEN 301 549:
9.1.1.3, 11.1.3.3

Online betrachten

Synonyms: Tab sequence, focus order

See also: Use of the keyboar, Changes of context, Time limits

The navigation sequence decides the sequence in which the elements and areas to be focused with the keyboard receive the focus. Typically, this applies to the following navigation methods:

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
64Navigation sequenceThe navigation sequence must be such that the contents can be viewed in a meaningful sequence and the control elements can be accessed according to their task-appropriate processing sequence.

Note: This is achieved, for example:

  • when opening a modal dialog this receives the focus,

  • when closing a modal dialog, the focus is reset to the triggering element,

  • the buttons for submitting a form are located at the end of the form

MustEN 301 549: 11.2.4.3

65Navigation sequenceIn the case of elements which are operated with the arrow keys, the navigation must be limited to the element when using the arrow keys.

Note: This relates to, for example, radio button groups, selection lists, tabs, menus, toolbars..

MustEN 301 549: 9.2.4.3, 11.2.4.3
66Navigation sequenceAfter page updates which make a focus change necessary, the focus must be positioned so that the work can be continued in a consistent way.

For example: After deleting an element, the focus should be positioned on the previous or next element.

MustEN 301 549: 9.2.4.3, 11.2.4.3
67Navigation sequenceWith modal dialogs, the navigation must be limited to the dialog.

Note: The rest of the application can only be focused and operated when the modal dialog is closed.

MustEN 301 549: 9.2.4.3, 11.2.4.3
68Navigation sequenceThe navigation sequence should be appropriate for the work task.

Note 1: For German language applications, this usually means that the navigation should correspond to the reading sequence, and should take place from the top left to the bottom right.

Note 2: The navigation sequence should match in both navigation directions (forward and backward).

Note 3: It may be necessary for the visual sequence to be adjusted to meet this requirement.

ShouldDIN EN ISO 9241-171: 9.3.18
69Web: Amount of navigation stepsIt must be possible to skip areas of content that occur on several pages (see Practical tip: efficient keyboard navigation).MustEN 301 549: 9.2.4.1
70Change of contextNo loss of focus may occur during the keyboard navigation.MustEN 301 549: 9.3.2.1, 11.3.2.1
71Change of contextForm elements may not be subject to an unexpected loss of focus when changing their value (see Change of context).MustEN 301 549: 9.3.2.2, 11.3.2.2
72Change of contextWhen using the keyboard, the focus must be positioned correctly if an expected change of context occurs that has to be operated. Alternatively, the change of context must receive the keyboard focus after the current focus position (see change of context).MustEN 301 549: 9.2.4.3, 11.2.4.3
73Web: ConsistencyNavigation elements must be displayed in the same relative sequence on each page within the application and receive the keyboard focus (see Consistency).MustEN 301 549: 9.3.2.3
74Desktop: ConsistencyNavigation elements should be displayed in the same relative sequence on each screen within the application and receive the keyboard focus (see Konsistenz).ShouldWCAG 2.1: 3.2.3 (AA)

The correct navigation sequence should be controlled by the order of the elements in the source code. The tabindex=0 attribute should not be used. The autofocus attribute should only be used with caution, as the contents before the automatically focused element are only perceptible with difficulty for visually impaired or blind people. There are applications in which autofocus can be put to good use, however, e.g. on a login page for the focusing of the first input field. Further information: 6.6.3 The tabindex attribute - HTML Standard (whatwg.org), 6.6.7 The autofocus attribute - HTML Standard (whatwg.org)

The correct navigation sequence should be controlled by the order of the elements in the source code. The tabindex=0 attribute must be used for control elements that would not otherwise receive the keyboard focus. Elements that should be focusable by JavaScript but are not automatically in the TAB circuit are marked with tabindex=-1. This applies, for example, to buttons in toolsbars, Einträge in selection lists oder radio buttons within a group of radio buttons. In these cases, just one button, one list entry and/or one radio button is marked with tabindex=0 and all others are marked with tabindex=-1. Further information: Developing a Keyboard Interface | APG | WAI | W3C

If the current application window contains several focusable elements, users who depend on the use of a keyboard cannot navigate through the window efficiently because they have to use the TAB key to navigate through these elements. To allow for an efficient form of keyboard navigation, it is recommended that one or more of the following methods are implemented and documented in the Hilfe option:

Changes of context

Online betrachten

Synonyms: Updates, change of context

See also: Animations, time limits, navigation sequence, modal dialog

Changes of context are:

Changes of context expected and required during operation include:

Examples of unexpected changes of context which must be avoided or announced:

Examples of unexpected changes of context which have to be avoided or announced:

Examples of unexpected changes of context which must be avoided:

Operation

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
75Use of the keyboard, use of pointing deviceDuring the focusing of an element, no change of context may occur.MustEN 301 549:
9.3.2.1, 11.3.2.1
76Use of the keyboard, use of pointing deviceWhen a form element changes its value, no unexpected change of context may occur.

Note 1: Unexpected changes of context are changes of context that do not conform to the default behavior of the element and have not been previously announced.

Note 2: If unexpected changes of context prevent the use of the keyboard (e.g. due to a loss of focus during use), these are not permitted, even if they are announced in advance.

MustEN 301 549:
9.3.2.2, 11.3.2.2
77Use of the keyboard, use of pointing deviceChanges of context should only occur if the users have initiated them. Alternatively, the user should be able to disable the changes of context.ShouldWCAG 2.1: 3.2.5 (AAA)
78UpdatesIt must be possible to disable or adjust automatic changes of context that do not take place after 20 hours (seee time limits and animations).MustEN 301 549:
9.2.2.1, 11.2.2.1, 9.2.2.2, 11.2.2.2
79UpdatesIt should be possible to avoid or disable automatic changes of context.

Note: This does not apply to emergency messages.

ShouldWCAG 2.1:
2.2.3 (AAA),
2.2.4 (AAA)

Programming/interfaces

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
80UpdateStatus messages must be marked so that they are output by the assistive technology without receiving the focus.MustEN 301 549:
9.4.1.3, 11.4.1.3.1

Time limits

Online betrachten

Synonyme: Timeout, Time limit

See also: Animations, changes of context, authentication, carousel

Time limits are specified time constraints in which to view content, operate elements or complete tasks. Time limits may occur, for example, if

Presentation and operation

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
81Use of the keyboardThe use of the keyboard must be possible without specified time constraints.

Note: The following, for example, is not permitted:

  • having to press a key for a certain time to trigger the associated function,

  • having to press two keys in succession with a certain gap.

MustEN 301 549:
9.2.1.1, 11.2.1.1.1
82AdaptabilityIt must be possible for time limits
  • to be disabled in advance, or

  • to be adjusted in advance (extendible to at least 10-times the time), or

  • to be extendible to at least 10 times the time with a simple action at least 20 seconds before expiry.

Note: This does not apply to time limits

  • which last longer than 20 hours, or

  • which are necessary (e.g. during a test or during real-time events such as an auction).

MustEN 301 549: 9.2.2.1, 11.2.2.1
83AvoidTime limits should be avoided.

Note: This does not apply to, e.g. real-time events or videos

ShouldWCAG 2.1: 2.2.3 (AAA)
84InformUsers should be notified in advance of time limits which may lead to a loss of data.

Note: This does not apply to time limits which last longer than 20 hours.

ShouldWCAG 2.1: 2.2.6 (AAA)

Element-spanning requirements

Online betrachten

Table of contents

Element status

Online betrachten

See also: Operability status, focus indicator

Several control elements can have a status, e.g.

Note: Which specific status is possible for which control element is specified by the programming language used.

Note: Specific recommendations on specific status changes for individual elements are described at the respective element.

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
85ContrastIf the status difference is only conveyed visually with the use of color, the contrast ratio between these colors must be at least 3:1.

Note 1: Alternatively, the status difference can be conveyed as follows:

  • different frame shape,

  • different font style,

  • icons.

Note 2: If different frames or icons are used to convey the status difference, they must have a contrast ratio of at least 3:1 with respect to the background.

MustEN 301 549:
9.1.4.1, 11.1.4.1, 9.1.4.11, 11.1.4.11
86ContrastRegardless of the status, a contrast ratio of at least 4.5:1 for text and 3:1 for the content of graphics must be maintained.MustEN 301 549:
9.1.4.3, 11.1.4.3, 9.1.4.11, 11.1.4.11

Operation

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
87Use of the keyboardStatus changes that can be made with a pointing device must also be possible with the use of the keyboard (see Use of the keyboard).MustEN 301 549:
9.2.1.1, 11.2.1.1

Programming/interfaces

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
88StatusThe status of the control element must be communicated to the Accessibility API.MustEN 301 549:
9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5, 11.5.2.13
89Status changeThe status change must be possible using the Accessibility API.MustEN 301 549:
9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.14, 11.5.2.16
90UpdateStatus updates must be communicated to the Accessibility API.MustEN 301 549:
9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.15
91Contrast adjustmentTo ensure that the status of the elements is visible when using contrast adjustment, the status should not only be communicated in color.ShouldEN 301 549: 11.7

Operability status

Online betrachten

Synonyms: disabled, inactive, display mode, write-protected, read-only, display-only

See also: Element status

Control elements can be operated (standard) or disabled. Form fields can also be read-only or in display mode.

Note: Which specific status is possible for which control element is specified by the programming language used.

Presentation

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
92ContrastIf the status difference is only conveyed visually with the use of color, a contrast ratio of at least 3:1 must be maintained between the different colors.MustEN 301 549:
9.1.4.1, 11.1.4.1
93ContrastRegardless of the status, a contrast ratio of at least 4.5:1 for text and 3:1 for the content of graphics must be maintained.

Note: Contrast requirements do not apply to disabled elements unless they provide information.

MustEN 301 549: 9.1.4.3, 11.1.4.3, 9.1.4.11, 11.1.4.11

Operation

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
94Use of the keyboardIn applications that do not support the virtual Cursor , all operable and read-only elements as well as display mode elements must receive the keyboard focus. Disabled elements must receive the focus if they convey information.

Note: If the application contains several disabled elements or elements in the display mode, to avoid unnecessary navigation steps for seeing keyboard users, there should be an operating mode in which only the operable elements receive the focus.

MustEN 301 549:
9.2.1.1, 11.2.1.1, 9.1.3.1, 11.1.3.1

Programming/interfaces

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
95StatusThe status of the control element must be communicated to the Accessibility API.MustEN 301 549:
9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5
96UpdateStatus updates must be communicated to the Accessibility API.MustEN 301 549:
9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.15
97Contrast adjustmentTo ensure that the status of the elements is also visible when using contrast adjustment disabled elements should be marked as such. To ensure that their status is identifiable when using contrast adjustment, read-only elements should not only differ from operable elements in terms of their color. Elements in the display mode should be marked as text.ShouldEN 301 549: 11.7

Consistency

Online betrachten

Synonyms: Conformity with expectations

Consistent design and operation helps users to understand and operate the application efficiently. Consistency should be aimed for:

Presentation

Nr.EigenschaftBeschreibungKlassifizierungReferenz
98Web: Consistent presentationControl elements and content with the same function must be labeled and designed consistently within the application.MustEN 301 549: 9.3.2.4
99Web: Consistent presentationNavigation elements must be displayed in the same relative sequence on each page within the application and receive the keyboard focus.

Note 1: The same relative order means that, for example, elements A and B always occur on the pages in the order “A B” and not as “B A”, although depending on the page, further elements may be between A and B (e.g. “A X B” and “A Y B”).

Note 2: This does not apply if the sequence of the navigation elements has been changed by the users.

MustEN 301 549: 9.3.2.3
100Desktop: Consistent presentationControl elements and content with the same function should be labeled and designed consistently within the application.ShouldWCAG 2.1: 3.2.4 (AA)
101Desktop: Consistent presentationNavigation elements should be displayed in the same relative sequence on each screen within the application and receive the keyboard focus.ShouldWCAG 2.1: 3.2.3 (AA)

Programming/interfaces

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
102NameThe visual label must match or be included in the Accessible Name.MustEN 301 549:
9.2.5.3, 11.2.5.3.1
103Web: NameControl elements with the same function must be labeled consistently within the application using the Accessible Name.MustEN 301 549: 9.3.2.4
104Desktop: NameControl elements with the same function should be labeled consistently within the application using the Accessible Name.ShouldWCAG 2.1: 3.2.4 (AA)

Keyboard shortcuts and shortcut keys

Online betrachten

Synonyms for keyboard shortcuts: Key combination, keyboard combination, keyboard command, keyboard equivalents, key sequence, access key, hot key, shortcut

Synonyms for shortcut keys: Mnemonic, acceleration key, shortcut key, menu accelerator

Keyboard shortcuts are keys or combinations of keys with which functions can be initialized or elements can be focused from within the application. The keyboard shortcuts can be initialized regardless of the current focus position. Keyboard shortcuts often consist of a combination of a printable character (letter, number, special character) with one or more modifier keys (e.g. CTRL or ALT). Keyboard shortcuts must be unique.

Shortcut keys are keys that can only be used within an element for the purpose of efficient navigation. They are usually used in menus. The shortcut key is usually the first letter of the corresponding element (e.g. menu item). Shortcut keys do not have to be unique: If, for example, different entries within a menu have the same shortcut key, the entries can be focused one after the other by pressing the key. Shortcut keys are used without modifier keys.

Presentation

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
105DocumentationKeyboard shortcuts that are necessary for exiting a keyboard trap must be documented in the application in such a way that they are perceptible before the keyboard trap or when it is reached.MustEN 301 549:
9.2.1.2, 11.2.1.2
106DocumentationKeyboard shortcuts that are necessary for operating the application must be documented in the Help option.MustEN 301 549:
12.1.1
107DocumentationAll keyboard shortcuts and shortcut keys should be documented in the application.ShouldWCAG 2.1: 3.3.5 (AAA)

Operation

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
108Keyboard shortcutIf printable characters are used as keyboard shortcuts without a modifier key, it must be possible to:
  • disable the keyboard shortcut, or

  • set the keyboard shortcut so that it can be used with modifier keys.

MustEN 301 549:
9.2.1.4, 11.2.1.4.1
109Keyboard shortcutKeyboard shortcuts should not be the only way of using the keyboard, but an additional method.

Note: all control elements should therefore receive the focus with TAB or arrow keys.

ShouldDIN EN ISO 9241-171: 9.3.10

Programming/interfaces

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
110DocumentationKeyboard shortcuts that are necessary for exiting a keyboard trap must be communicated to the Accessibility API in the application in such a way that they are perceptible before the keyboard trap or when it is reached.MustEN 301 549:
9.2.1.2, 11.2.1.2
111DocumentationKeyboard shortcuts and shortcut keys that are visually perceptible in the application must also be communicated to the Accessibility API.MustEN 301 549:
9.1.3.1, 11.1.3.1

Practical tip: keyboard shortcuts and shortcut keys

Platform-specific keyboard shortcuts

The keyboard shortcuts of the platform (of the Windows operating system, for example) should not be overridden or disabled in your application. i.e. the keyboard shortcuts of the platform should also work in the application (e.g. CTRL+X and CTRL+V to cut and paste text).

Keyboard shortcuts of assistive technology

The assistive technology uses several keyboard shortcuts. These keyboard shortcuts should not be used in the application, as otherwise the assistive technology or the application won’t work with these keyboard shortcuts.

The screen readers use the INSERT key as a modifier key for several of their keyboard shortcuts, for example. Therefore, the INSERT key should not be used as a modifier key for the keyboard shortcuts of the application.

As assistive technology also uses additional modifier keys and keyboard shortcuts without modifier keys, it should be possible to redefine or disable application-specific keyboard shortcuts.

Configuring keyboard shortcuts

Regardless of the assistive technology which is used, keyboard shortcuts are important for people who depend on the use of the keyboard. The application should therefore make it possible to define special keyboard shortcuts for all functions, even if they are not provided with any keyboard shortcuts by default. Where this is possible, the Help option should make reference to it.

Documentation of the keyboard shortcuts and shortcut keys

The keyboard shortcuts should be explicitly documented in the application, i.e. in text form at the respective element (permanently visible or in a tooltip), e.g. “Print (CTRL+D)”.

The shortcut keys should be implicitly documented in the application, by underlining the letter for example, such as “Print”.

The shortcut keys within selection lists and drop-down lists are not generally documented – there, the first letter of the respective list entry acts as the shortcut key.

In the Help option, the keyboard shortcuts should be documented as follows:

Use of the pointing device

Online betrachten

Synonyms: Use of the mouse, use of the touch pad, use of the pen, pointing device operation, pointer operation

See also: Use of the keyboard

The use of the pointing device encompasses all the operational modalities with a pointing device, e.g.

Presentation

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
112Web: ConsistencyControl elements that have the same functionality must be designed consistently within the application.MustEN 301 549: 9.3.2.4
113Desktop: ConsistencyControl elements that have the same functionality should be designed consistently within the application.ShouldWCAG 2.1: 3.2.4 (AA)

Operation

From the perspective of accessibility, there is no compulsory requirement for an application to be operable with a pointing device. All that is required is the operation with the keyboard. However, if an application can be operated with a pointing device, specific requirements must be met.

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
114Use of the keyboardIt must be possible to operate the entire application using the keyboard, i.e. all the functions that can be initialized with a pointing device can also be operated using the keyboard.

Note: This does not apply to path-bound inputs, such as a freehand screen in an image editing program.

MustEN 301 549:
9.2.1.1, 11.2.1.1
115BiometryIf biometric data is required for operational purposes (e.g. fingerprint, facial recognition), an alternative method of operation must be made available.

Note: The alternative method may also be based on biometric data provided that a different form of biometric data is used for this.

MustEN 301 549: 5.3
116ComplexityThe complex use of the pointing device must be avoided, unless
  • a non-complex, alternative form of operation is available,

  • the complex form of operation is essential,

  • the complex form of operation is for the control of the assistive technology.

Please note: Complex use of the pointing device means

  • multipoint operation (e.g. swiping with several fingers),

  • path-based operation (where the start and end points of the use of the pointing device aren’t just relevant, but at least one intermediate point is).

MustEN 301 549:
9.2.5.1, 11.2.5.1
117ComplexityThe dragging use of the pointing device should be avoided, unless:
  • a non-complex use of the pointing device without dragging is available,

  • the complex form of operation is essential,

  • the complex form of operation is for the control of the assistive technology.

Note 1: This applies to sliders and drag and drop functions, for example.

Note 2: An alternative use of the keyboard for the dragging use of the pointing device (using a keyboard shortcut, for example) is not sufficient. An alternative use of the pointing device should be available which can also include text input, however.

ShouldWCAG 2.2
118Shown contentIf additional content is shown when hovering with a pointing device, it must be possible to hide such content again without moving the pointing device away, unless:

Note 1: This does not apply to unchanged content which is displayed by the platform software by default, such as standard tooltips for the respective programming language.

Note 2: The automatically-shown content can be hidden, e.g., with ESC or clicking on the triggering element, as long as no other actions are triggered.

MustEN 301 549:
9.1.4.13, 11.1.4.13
119Shown contentIf additional content is shown when hovering with a pointing device, this content must be displayed until the pointing device is moved away from the triggering element and/or content shown, unless:
  • the content was deliberately closed (e.g. with ESC) or

  • the content is no longer valid (e.g. an error message in the input field after inputting a correct value).

Note: This does not apply to unchanged content which is displayed by the platform software by default, such as standard tooltips for the respective programming language.

MustEN 301 549:
9.1.4.13, 11.1.4.13
120Shown contentIf additional content is shown when hovering with a pointing device, it must then be possible to move over this content with the pointing device, i.e. the content may not be hidden as soon as the pointing device is no longer positioned over the triggering element.

Note 1: This does not apply to unchanged content which is displayed by the platform software by default, such as standard tooltips for the respective programming language.

Note 2: To be able to move over the shown content, the content must be displayed at the triggering element.

MustEN 301 549:
9.1.4.13, 11.1.4.13
121Cancelling the use of the pointerDuring the use of the pointing device, the function of the control element may not be performed during the pressing (down event), but during the actual release (up event) unless:
  • the triggering of the function during the pressing of the key is essential (an electronic piano or a keyboard simulation, for example),

  • during the pressing, the function is automatically reversed upon the release, or

  • the function is part of a more complex function that can be canceled (e.g., picking up a drag-and-drop object by pressing the key on the pointing device and completing the action by releasing it again).

MustEN 301 549:
9.2.5.2, 11.2.5.2
122Click areaThe click area of the control element should be at least 24 x 24 px.

Note 1: This does not apply to:

  • elements with which the offset of the click areas is more than 24 px,

  • elements that are situated within continuous text (e.g. links),

  • elements whose size is essential.

Note 2: The offset of the click areas is defined as the spacing between the farthest point of one element and the nearest point of the other element. The offset is determined in both directions and must be at least 24 px in each case.

ShouldWCAG 2.2
123Click areaThe click area of the control element should be at least 44 x 44 px.

Note: This does not apply to:

  • elements whose function can be initialized using an alternative element with sufficient size (44 x 44 px),

  • elements that are situated within continuous text (e.g. links),

  • elements whose size is essential.

ShouldWCAG 2.1: 2.5.5 (AAA)
124Different methods of operationUsers should be able to switch between different methods of operation (e.g. operation using the keyboard or operation using the mouse) at any time.ShouldWCAG 2.1: 2.5.6 (AAA)

Use of the keyboard

Online betrachten

Synonyms: keyboard operation, keyboard interface

See also: Use of the pointing device,, fokus indicator, navigation sequence

It must be possible for all functions which can be initialized using a pointing device, motion control or voice input to also be initialized using the keyboard, as disabled users may not be able to use a pointing device and/or may not see the pointer, may not be able to perform the movement or may not be able to speak. It is also possible that disabled users are unable to use a keyboard, but their assistive technology simulates the keyboard and interacts with the keyboard interface of the operating system and/or the Accessibility API.

In this context, the simulation of a pointing device with the keyboard (e.g., keyboard mouse using the numeric keypad) is not considered a permissible alternative form of operation to the use of the pointing device.

Presentation

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
125ContrastThe contrast requirements must also be met when using the keyboard, e.g. when receiving the focus (see Colors and contrasts).MustEN 301 549:
9.1.4.3, 11.1.4.3, 9.1.4.11, 11.1.4.11
126Focus visibilityIf a control element receives the keyboard focus, the focus indicator must be visible (see Fokus indicator).MustEN 301 549:
9.2.4.7, 11.2.4.7
127Focus visibilityThe focus indicator must have a contrast ratio of at least 3:1 with respect to the background.MustEN 301 549:
9.1.4.11, 11.1.4.11
128Web: ConsistencyControl elements that have the same functionality must be designed consistently within the application. (see Consistency)MustEN 301 549: 9.3.2.4
129Web: ConsistencyNavigation elements must be displayed in the same relative sequence on each page within the application and receive the keyboard focus.MustEN 301 549: 9.3.2.3
130Desktop: ConsistencyControl elements that have the same functionality should be designed consistently within the application.ShouldWCAG 2.1: 3.2.4 (AA)
131Desktop: ConsistencyNavigation elements that repeat on several screens should always be displayed in the same sequence and receive the focus.ShouldWCAG 2.1: 3.2.3 (AA)

Operation

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
132Use of the keyboardIt must be possible to operate the entire application using the keyboard. This does not apply to necessary path-bound inputs, such as a signature or a freehand screen in an image editing program.

Note 1: An application is operable with the keyboard if all the interactive elements can be accessed and operated with the keyboard.

Note 2: If control elements do not receive the keyboard focus, an alternative use of the keyboard for the corresponding functions must be offered.

MustEN 301 549:
9.2.1.1, 11.2.1.1
133Use of the keyboardPath-bound inputs should also be operable with the keyboard.ShouldWCAG 2.1: 2.1.3 (AAA)
134ConsistencyThe use of the keyboard should be possible according to the known conventions of the platform software. If the use of the keyboard deviates from these conventions, the users should be informed accordingly.

Note: The use of the keyboard for individual elements is described in the “Use of the keyboard” section in this document.

ShouldISO 9241-171:
9.3.15
135Time limitsThe use of the keyboard must be possible without specified time constraints.

Note: For example, it is not permitted

  • that a key has to be pressed for a certain time to trigger an action.

  • that within a certain period of time, two keys must be pressed in succession to trigger an action.

MustEN 301 549:
9.2.1.1, 11.2.1.1
136Keyboard trapThe application may not contain any keyboard traps.

Note: A keyboard trap is an element of the page that can be accessed using the keyboard but cannot be left again using the keyboard.
It must be possible to exit the element using either the standard navigation buttons (such as the tab key, arrow keys, ESC), or users must be informed of the Keyboard shortcuts which allow them to exit.

MustEN 301 549:
9.2.1.2, 11.2.1.2
137Keyboard shortcutsKeyboard shortcuts for printable characters without a modifier key may not be used, unless:
  • the keyboard shortcuts can be disabled,

  • the keyboard shortcuts used can be redefined so that it is not necessary to use any printable characters,

  • the keyboard shortcuts only apply if the keyboard focus is on a specific element.

Note: Modifier keys include the Alt and Ctrl keys. Printable characters include upper and lower case letters, numbers, punctuation marks, and special characters. Among others, the following keys can be used without a modifier key: ESC, delete, function keys, tab key, enter key, space bar, arrow keys.

MustEN 301 549:
9.2.1.4, 11.2.1.4
138Navigation sequenceBei der Navigation mit der Tastatur muss die Navigationsreihenfolge aufgabenangemessen sein (siehe Navigation sequence).MustEN 301 549:
9.2.4.3, 11.2.4.3
139Navigation sequenceWhen navigating with the keyboard, the focus order of the work task should be appropriate.ShouldEN 301 549:
9.2.4.3, 11.2.4.3
140Motion controlIf it is possible for the application to be controlled by motion, it must be possible to disable the motion control and provide a keyboard alternative to the motion control.

Note 1: Motion control encompasses both the movement of the hardware and the movements of the users, which are registered by the software by camera, for example.

Note 2: This does not include necessary motion controls, such those with a pedometer or a GPS device.

MustEN 301 549:
9.2.5.4, 11.2.5.4
141BiometryIf biometric data is required for operational purposes (e.g. fingerprint, facial recognition), an alternative method of operation must be made available.

Note: The alternative method may also be based on biometric data provided that a different form of biometric data is used for this.

MustEN 301 549: 5.3
142Change of contextWhen navigating with the keyboard, no Change of context may occur.MustEN 301 549:
9.3.2.1, 11.3.2.1
143Change of contextWhen changing the value of form elements with the keyboard, no unexpected change of context may occur.MustEN 301 549:
9.3.2.2, 11.3.2.2
144Shown contentIf additional content is shown when receiving keyboard focus, it must be possible to hide such content again using the keyboard without moving the keyboard focus away, unless

Note 1: This does not apply to unchanged content which is displayed by the platform software by default, such as standard tooltips for the respective programming language.

HNote 2: The automatically-shown content can be hidden with ESC, for example.

MustEN 301 549:
9.1.4.13, 11.1.4.13
145Shown contentIf additional content is shown when receiving keyboard focus, it must be displayed until the keyboard focus is moved away, unless
  • the content was deliberately closed (e.g. with ESC) or

  • the content is no longer valid (e.g. an error message in the input field after inputting a correct value).

Note: This does not apply to unchanged content which is displayed by the platform software by default, such as standard tooltips for the respective programming language.

MustEN 301 549:
9.1.4.13, 11.1.4.13
146Different methods of operationUsers should be able to switch between different methods of operation (e.g. operation using the keyboard or operation using the mouse) at any time.ShouldWCAG 2.1: 2.5.6 (AAA)
147Web: EfficiencyIt must be possible to skip areas of content that occur on several pages using the keyboard (see Practical tip: efficient keyboard navigation).MustEN 301 549: 9.2.4.1
148EfficiencyIt must be possible to initialize frequently used functions efficiently with the keyboard.

Note: To do this, keyboard shortcuts and context menus can be implemented. The keyboard shortcuts should be documented in the application and the Help option.

ShouldDIN EN ISO 9241-171: 9.3.10

Use of the keyboard (general requirements)

Note: The operation of individual elements is described at the respective element.

Note: The use of the keyboard does not generally need to be implemented separately, as it is already made available by the platform software or the framework which is used. Care should be taken to avoid overwriting the keyboard shortcuts for other individual functions, however.

ActionKeyClassification
Navigating to an interactive element, exiting an interactive elementTABRequired
Reversal of the direction of navigationSHIFT + [Navigation key]

z. B. SHIFT+TAB oder SHIFT+F6
Required
Highlight, selectSHIFT + [Navigation key]

z. B. SHIFT+DOWN ARROW oder SHIFT+POS1
Required
Navigate within interactive elements (e.g. table, tree structure, selection list, radio button group, etc.)Arrow keysRequired
Enabling of interactive elements
  • ENTER

  • PSACE

Required
Opening the context menu
  • CONTEXT MENU

  • SHIFT+F10

Required
Desktop: Desktop: System menu of the application windowALT+SAPCERequired
Quick navigation to start and end
  • POS1

  • END

Recommended
Quick navigation (skip multiple elements)
  • PAGE UP

  • PAGE DOWN

Recommended
Desktop: Focusing and exiting the main menu
  • ALT

  • F10

Recommended
Desktop: Navigating between application areas
  • CTRL+TAB

  • F6

Recommended
Closing of shown content (such as tooltips, pop-ups, sub-menus)ESCRecommended
Select allCTRL+ARecommended
Copy selection to clipboardCTRL+CRecommended
Cut selection to clipboardSTRG+XRecommended
Paste from clipboardCTRL+VRecommended
Undo the last actionCTRL+ZRecommended
Repeat the last action and/or restore the undoCTRL+YRecommended
Delete elementsDELRecommended
Desktop: Initialize HelpF1Recommended
Desktop: Initialize context-sensitive HelpSHIFT+F1Recommended
Desktop: Closing the applicationALT+F4Recommended

Programming/interfaces

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
149Desktop: OperationAll the control options of the element must be communicated to the Accessibility API.MustEN 301 549:
11.5.2.11
150OperationIt must be possible to run all the control options of the element with the assistive technology (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.12, 11.5.2.14, 11.5.2.16, 11.5.2.17
151Keyboard shortcut, shortcut keyKeyboard shortcuts and shortcut keys that are visually perceptible in the application must also be communicated to the Accessibility API.MustEN 301 549: 9.1.3.1, 11.1.3.1
152PositionThe focused element and the selected entry within an element must be communicated to the Accessibility API.MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.13
153Desktop: PositionThe position of the text cursor must be communicated to the Accessibility API.MustEN 301 549: 11.5.2.13
154Desktop: PositionThe spatial size and position of the elements must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Focus indicator).MustEN 301 549:
11.5.2.5, 11.5.2.10

Practical tip: use of the keyboard in Web and desktop applications

Custom elements

The standard elements of the marking and/or programming language or of the framework used are generally fully keyboard-operable. They should therefore be used with preference.

If custom elements are used, in terms of the keyboard operability, it is necessary to pay attention to the following in particular:

If a custom element is implemented, it is often recommended that a related default element is used and customized accordingly, as it is then possible to use the basic functionality of the default element.

Drag & Drop

Dragging and dropping elements (drag and drop) can only be done with a pointing device. Designing the alternative form of operation with the keyboard so that it can be used efficiently and in accordance with expectations is recommended. Possible variants include

A combination of the variants is often a good idea (e.g. buttons and keyboard shortcuts).

As the alternative form of operation with the keyboard is not usually visible, it should be described in the application and the Help option.

Control elements that are not permanently visible

Control elements that are shown and hidden when using the application, e.g.

are not usually operable with the keyboard.

Displaying control elements all the time and avoiding control elements in tooltips, for example, is recommended.

Alternatively, an alternative form of operation must be implemented using the keyboard and described in the Help option and the application. In addition to this, the application must be designed so that it is perceptible with the assistive technology when elements that are not always visible are shown. Blind users, for example, must be able to perceive that a tooltip contains control elements with the screen reader, so that they can use the documented alternative form of operation with the keyboard.

User preferences

Online betrachten

Synonyms: User settings, customization, individual adaptation, adaptation to preferences, user preferences

See also: Colors and contrasts,, font, Focus indicator

Presentation

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
155User preferencesThe application must comply with the platform settings for measurement units, color, contrast, font style, font size, and focus pointer (mouse and text cursors, and focus indicator), unless overridden by users.

Note 1: This does not apply to applications that are isolated from the platform and do not have access to the platform settings.

Note 2: The application is also able to offer an alternative mode that does not apply the platform settings.

Note 3: In the case of Web applications, the browser is the platform whose settings are to be applied. The browser is also able to accept settings from the operating system.

MustEN 301 549:
11.7
156User preferencesIf users change the platform settings for color, contrast, font style and font size, all content must be displayed correctly, and all features must be functional.

Note 1: This means, for example, that after adjusting the font style or font size, the text content is displayed in full and without overlay.

Note 2: If users have adjusted the colors or contrasts and the selected colors have been applied correctly by the application, the application is not responsible for complying with the contrast ratios (see Practical tip: contrast adjustment).

MustEN 301 549: 11.7, 9.1.4.3, 11.1.4.3, 9.1.4.4, 11.1.4.4.1, 9.1.4.5, 11.1.4.5.1, 9.1.4.10, 11.1.4.10, 9.1.4.11, 11.1.4.11, 9.1.4.12, 11.1.4.12
157User preferencesIt should be possible to make the following settings for text blocks:
  • The foreground and background colors can be adapted to the user requirements without adjusting the other colors of the application.

  • The length of a line of text can be limited to 80 characters.

  • The justify text setting can be disabled.

  • The line spacing can be increased to 150% of the standard line spacing.

  • The paragraph spacing can be increased to 1.5 times the line spacing.

ShouldWCAG 2.1: 1.4.8 (AAA)

Practical tip: contrast adjustment for desktop applications

In Windows, users can customize the presentation of the colors to suit their needs (Settings > Ease of Access > High contrast). Unlike other operating systems which only allow certain color changes (such as coloring, darkening or inverting the colors), Windows allows you to freely choose the foreground and background colors. In addition to this, it is possible to define individual colors for different element types and/or their status.

With Windows Contrast Adjustment, it is possible to adjust the colors for the following elements and states:

For Windows Contrast Adjustment to work correctly in an application, the following must be considered:

Example 1: The two following figures show two lines with two pieces of text, two buttons and two links – one in the default presentation (figure on the left), and one with the use of Windows Contrast Adjustment (Contrast no. 1).

Figure 6: Text, button and link in the default presentation (left) and with the use of Windows Contrast Adjustment (right).

Example 2: In the two following figures, one operable button (“Send”) and two disabled buttons (“Check” and “Delete”) are shown – one in the default presentation (the figure on the left), and one with the use of Windows Contrast Adjustment (Contrast no. 1).

Figure 7: One operable and two disabled buttons in the default presentation (left) and with the use of Windows Contrast Adjustment (right).

Example 3: In the two following figures, four buttons are shown that are labeled with a black icon – one in the default presentation (figure on the left), and one with the use of Windows Contrast Adjustment (Contrast no. 1).

Figure 8: Four icon buttons in the default presentation (left) and with the use of Windows Contrast Adjustment (right).

Colors and contrasts

Online betrachten

Synonyms: Color coding, color, contrast

See also: text, font, graphics, contrast adjustment

Colors are an important visual design tool. People with impaired vision may not perceive colors or differences in color (contrasts), however.

Presentation

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
158Text contrastAll text content must have a contrast ratio of at least 4.5:1 with respect to the background.

Note 1: With large font (from 24 px and/or from 18.7 px in the case of bold font), a contrast ratio of at least 3:1 is sufficient.

Note 2: The contrast requirements do not apply to

  • disabled elements if they do not communicate any information,

  • purely decorative text content,

  • invisible text content,

  • incidental text content in figures that are not relevant to the understanding of the figure,,

  • logos and brand names insofar as they are not used as control elements.

Note 3: We recommend that you always use a plain-colored background for text and no graphics or color gradients.

MustEN 301 549: 11.1.4.3
159Text contrastAll text content must have a contrast ratio of at least 7:1 with respect to the background.

Note: With large font (from 24 px and/or from 18.7 px in the case of bold font), a contrast ratio of at least 4.5:1 is sufficient.

ShouldWCAG 2.1: 1.4.6 (AAA)
160Graphics contrastAll content of graphics must have a contrast ratio of at least 3:1. This applies to the contrast of the graphic with the background as well as to the contrasts within the graphic (between neighboring areas) insofar as they are relevant to the understanding of the graphic.

Note 1: The contrast requirements do not apply to

  • purely decorative graphics,

  • graphics whose information is also available in text form,

  • certain photographs (e.g. of people and landscapes),

  • screenshots,

  • figures in which the colors used are specified, with heat maps and medical charts, for example,

  • logos and flags, insofar as they are not used as the only label for control elements.

Note 2: If the contrast between neighboring colors is not sufficient within a graphic, for the purpose of visual differentiation,

  • a contour can be inserted, or

  • the area can be provided with hatching,

insofar as the contour and/or hatching have a contrast ratio of at least 3:1.

MustEN 301 549: 11.1.4.1, 11.1.4.11
161Contrast of information to status and typeAll information necessary for identifying the type or status of a control element must have a contrast ratio of at least 3:1 to the background or neighboring colors.

Note 1: This relates to the border of form fields, the focus indicator and to a graphical element that identifies a selected option (within a selection list, menu, table, etc).

Note 2: The contrast requirements do not apply to

  • disabled elements if they do not communicate any information,

  • standard elements whose presentation has not been changed.

MustEN 301 549: 11.1.4.11
162ContrastThe contrast ratios must be maintained in each status of the element, e.g. upon receiving the focus with the keyboard, when hovering with a pointing device, and during use and/or enabling with the keyboard or pointing device.

Note: When hovering or during operation with a pointing device, the elements can, but do not have to change their appearance (e.g. text or background color). A clearly visible focus indicator is only necessaryduring the keyboard navigation.

MustEN 301 549: 11.1.4.3, 11.1.4.11
163Anti-aliasingSince the anti-aliasing influences the presentation of the defined colors, care should be taken to ensure sufficient line thicknesses and/or contrast ratios (see Practical tip: anti-aliasing)Should
164Color codingIf information is communicated by using different colors, then all colors (with respect to each other) must have a contrast ratio of at least 3:1.

Note: This applies if the colors themselves have no meaning, but only the color difference does.

MustEN 301 549: 11.1.4.1
165Color codingIf information is communicated using a particular color, this information must also be communicated in another way.

Note: This applies when the color itself has a meaning, such as “green” for correct and “red” for incorrect, or “black” for a positive number and “red” for a negative number.

MustEN 301 549: 11.1.4.1
166Color codingColor coding should be avoided.

Note: Even if a contrast ratio of at least 3:1 is maintained, the color-coded information may no longer be visible when using Windows contrast adjustment.

ShouldEN 301 549: 11.1.3.1
167User preferencesFor block text, it must be possible for the foreground and background colors to be adapted to the user requirements without adjusting the other colors of the application.ShouldWCAG 2.1: 1.4.8 (AAA)

Programming/interfaces

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
168Color codingInformation conveyed using color or color differences must be communicated to the Accessibility API programmatically or in text form.

Note: Color information can present the status of a control element, for example (disabled, incorrect, selected, see Element status and Operability status) and be programmatically communicated. The color information, in contrast, can be communicated in a diagram in text form (diagram data as a table).

MustEN 301 549:
11.1.3.1, 11.1.4.1

Practical tip: color coding

To comply with EN 301 549: 9.1.4.1 and 11.1.4.1, respectively, a distinction must be made between two different forms of color coding:

The color difference conveys a piece of information

Examples:

If the colors themselves have no meaning, but only the difference between the colors does, a contrast ratio of at least 3:1 between the colors is sufficient.

The use of another visual method, however, (e.g. icon, font style, size, position, shape, border, underline, text) to reproduce the information conveyed by the color difference is recommended, e.g.

Note: EN 301 549: 9.1.4.1 and 11.1.4.1 formulate requirements for visually impaired people who use the application without assistive technology. For users of assistive technology, according to EN 301 549: 9.1.3.1 and 11.1.3.1.1, additional requirements apply with regard to the color coding, e.g.

The color conveys a piece of information

Examples:

In these cases, the color itself provides a piece of information, and not just the difference between the colors. Therefore, a contrast ratio of at least 3:1 between colors is not sufficient in this case. Another visual method must certainly be used to convey the information, e.g.

Note: EN 301 549: 11.1.4.1 formulates requirements for visually impaired people who use the application without assistive technology. For users of assistive technology, according to EN 301 549: 11.1.3.1.1, additional requirements apply with regard to the color coding (see above).

Practical tip: anti-aliasing

Regarding the contrast requirements, the WCAG assumes that anti-aliasing has been disabled. However, this is unrealistic, as most users work with anti-aliasing enabled. Due to the anti-aliasing, in case of thin line thicknesses, the actual contrasts can be significantly below the contrasts that are calculated from the color values. Therefore, either the line thickness or the colors should be adjusted in such a way that the contrast ratio (of at least 4.5:1 for text and 3:1 for content of graphics) can also be maintained when anti-aliasing is enabled. Because the anti-aliasing can be configured differently, it is not possible to specify exact values. However, in most cases the following guideline values will help to ensure that the contrast ratios can be maintained:

In this context, it should be noted that a line thickness of 2 px is only achieved for letters above a certain font size; from 25 px for Arial and from 75 px for Times New Roman.

For example: In the following two figures, the letter “x” and a forward slash (“/”) are shown three times in the font style “Times New Roman” and with the font size 16 px. The contrast between the gray and/or black text color defined in the CSS and the white background is:

This means that the required minimum contrasts will be maintained throughout the text. In the considerably magnified presentation, however, it can be seen that due to the anti-aliasing, the contrasts calculated for the “x” are only partially achieved with the thicker downward line (diagonal line from the top left to the bottom right) and the horizontal serifs. For the thinner upward line (diagonal line from bottom left to top right), the contrast is clearly below this, e.g. at the most in the lower range at:

For the forward slash, the calculated contrasts are not achieved at any point.

Figure 9: Effect of anti-aliasing on contrasts using the example of “x/” in normal size.
Figure 10: Effect of anti-aliasing on contrasts using the example of “x/” with resizing.

Font

Online betrachten

Synonyme: Letters, characters, numbers, font

See also: Text, contrast, label, heading

The font is used for the presentation of text information.

Presentation

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
169User preferencesThe application must accept the font style, size, and color settings from the platform software or provide a mode in which the settings are applied.

Note 1: If the settings of the platform software are not applied automatically, the corresponding mode must be explained in the information on accessibility.

Note 2: The application can also offer a mode in which users can choose their preferences for the font style, size, color and any other possible font attributes directly in the application.

Note 3: The requirements concerning the contrasts only apply as long as the users have not adjusted the colors to their requirements.

MustEN 301 549:
11.7 und 12.1.1

170User preferencesIt should be possible to make the following settings for text blocks:
  • The foreground and background colors can be adapted to the user requirements without adjusting the other colors of the application.

  • The length of a line of text can be limited to 80 characters.

  • The justify text setting can be disabled.

  • The line spacing can be increased to 150% of the standard line spacing.

  • The paragraph spacing can be increased to 1.5 times the line spacing.

ShouldWCAG 2.1: 1.4.8 (AAA)
171ContrastAll text content must have a contrast ratio of at least 4.5:1 with respect to the background.

Note: With large font (from 24 px and/or from 18.7 px in the case of bold font), a contrast ratio of at least 3:1 is sufficient.

See Colors and contrasts.

MustEN 301 549:
9.1.4.3, 11.1.4.3
172ColorIf information is communicated using different font colors, the contrast ratio between the colors must be at least 3:1 (see Practical tip: color coding).

Note: This applies if the colors themselves have no meaning, but only the color difference does.

MustEN 301 549:
9.1.4.1, 11.1.4.1
173ColorIf information is conveyed using a particular font color, this information must also be conveyed in another way (see Practical tip: color coding).

Note: This applies when the color itself has a meaning, such as “green” for correct and “red” for incorrect, or “black” for a positive number and “red” for a negative number.

MustEN 301 549:
9.1.4.1, 11.1.4.1
174SpacingIf users are able to adjust the spacing between the lines, paragraphs, letters and words, then in this context, no content or functions may be lost.

Note: This applies to the following spacing:

  • line spacing up to 1.5 times the font size,

  • paragraph spacing up to 2 times the font size,

  • character spacing up to 0.12 times the font size,

  • word spacing up to 0.16 times the font size.

MustEN 301 549:
9.1.4.12, 11.1.4.12
175SpacingThe line spacing of continuous text should be 1.5 times the font size.ShouldWCAG 2.1: 1.4.8 (AAA)
176AbstandThe paragraph spacing for continuous text should be 1.5 times the size of the line spacing, i.e. 2.25 times the font size.ShouldWCAG 2.1: 1.4.8 (AAA)
177Reference to sensory propertiesInformation which serves the understanding or the operation of the application may not make exclusive reference to the written formatting of the described elements.MustEN 301 549:
9.1.3.3, 11.1.3.3
178Line lengthA line of text in continuous text should not exceed 80 characters.ShouldWCAG 2.1: 1.4.8 (AAA)
179OrientationJustify should be avoided in continuous text.

Note: Justify is the orientation of the text to the left and right margins.

ShouldWCAG 2.1: 1.4.8 (AAA)

Programming/interfaces

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
180Character setTo encode the font characters, a character set must be used whose characters can be output correctly by the assistive technology for the text-to-speech output.

Note: Currently, only letters that occur in the application language should be used, as other letters are not usually supported.

MustEN 301 549:
9.1.3.1, 11.1.3.1
181Special charactersSpecial characters may only be used if they are output correctly by the assistive technology.

Note: This applies to font icons and ligations, for example. Alternatively, these special characters must be marked so that they are ignored by the assistive technology. The information conveyed by the characters must then be communicated in text form or programmatically (see Practical tip: special characters).

MustEN 301 549:
9.1.1.1, 11.1.1.1, 9.1.3.1, 11.1.3.1
182HyphenationThe hyphenation requires the use of a character which is not output by the assistive technology. Otherwise, the hyphenation must be dispensed with.

Note: This does not apply if the hyphenation has to be perceptible, e.g. in a dictionary in which the possible hyphenations are specified.

MustEN 301 549:
9.1.3.2, 11.1.3.2
183Spaces, punctuation marksThe word boundary must be perceptible, with the use of a space, hyphen or punctuation mark, for example.MustEN 301 549:
9.1.3.2, 11.1.3.2
184SpacesA word may not contain any spaces or line breaks.MustEN 301 549:
9.1.3.2, 11.1.3.2
185FormattingIf font formatting is used to communicate information, this information must also be communicated to the Accessibility API in text form or programmatically.

Note: For example, an important piece of text which is highlighted in bold can also be preceded with “Note: ” or given a separate heading.

MustEN 301 549:
9.1.3.1, 11.1.3.1, 9.1.4.1, 11.1.4.1, 11.5.2.10

Practical tip: special characters

When using special characters, different use cases must be distinguished between in terms of the communication of the characters to the Accessibility API:

Decorative special characters

Purely decorative special characters are marked so that they are not communicated to the Accessibility API. The same rules apply to them as to layout graphics.

Examples:

Special characters which are not used according to their meaning are to be accompanied by an expressive alternative text. The same rules apply to them as to graphics.

Examples:

Note: If used as a required field label, the asterisk (“*”) is not considered to be non-purpose-related.

Special characters which are used according to their meaning can be used, provided the character is output correctly using the assistive technology. Otherwise, it should be accompanied by expressive alternative text.

Examples:

Figure 11: The word “guest” with a ligation

Special-purpose characters should be used sparingly. It is recommended to use a character which is output in concise form by the assistive technology.

Examples:

Figure 12: Sentence with special characters is output by the screen reader in a difficult to understand way

Practical tip: font style and text formatting

To make texts easy to read, a legible font style and text formatting should be chosen. In this respect, the following should be taken into account:

You can find more information at: https://www.leserlich.info (External Link).

Focus indicator

Online betrachten

Synonyms: Focus, focus frame, focus appearance

See also: Use of the keyboard, text cursor

The focus indicator displays which element currently has the keyboard focus (see DIN EN ISO 9241-161: 8.37).

The focus indicator is usually displayed with a border around the focused element. Other focus indicators are also permitted, provided that they meet the requirements, e.g.

In certain cases, several focus indicators can be displayed:

In some cases, the focus indicator can be identical to the selection marker (i.e. the marking of the selected option, see Element status), if the focused element is identical to the selected element:

Presentation

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
186GeneralThe focus indicator must be visible at each navigation step.MustEN 301 549:
9.2.4.7, 11.2.4.7
187ContrastThe focus indicator must have a contrast ratio of at least 3:1 with respect to the background.MustEN 301 549:
11.1.4.11
188ContrastThe elements must also have a contrast ratio of at least 4.5:1 for text and at least 3:1 for the content of graphics in the focused status.MustEN 301 549:
9.1.4.3, 11.1.4.3, 9.1.4.11, 11.1.4.11
189ConsistencyThe focus indicator should be clearly assignable to the focused element.MustEN 301 549:
9.2.4.7, 11.2.4.7
190VisibilityThe element must be scrolled into the visible area on receiving the focus so that both the element and its focus indicator are visible.

Note: This also applies when navigating the arrow keys through the list entries of a selection list, for example.

MustEN 301 549:
11.2.4.7
191SizeThe area of the focus indicator shall be at least as large as:
  • 1px times the circumference of the element or

  • 4px times the length of the shorter side.

ShouldWCAG 2.2

Operation

Use of the keyboard: focus indicator

The change of the focus indicator between the elements is described in the use of the keyboard and navigation sequence sections. By default, the navigation takes place with the TAB key.

The change of the focus indicator within an element is described at the respective elements. The navigation within elements often takes place with the arrow keys.

Use of the pointing device: focus indicator

ActionKeyClassification
Placing the focusLeft clickRequired

Programming/interfaces

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
192PositionThe focused element must be communicated to the Accessibility API.MustEN 301 549:
9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.13, 11.5.2.15
193Desktop: PositionThe size and position of the focused element must be communicated to the Accessibility API.

Note: This is important, for example, to ensure that screen magnifiers can display the focused element in the visible area and a focus highlighting.

MustEN 301 549:
11.5.2.5, 11.5.2.13
194OperationIt must be possible to position the focus with assistive technology (see Use of the keyboard).MustEN 301 549:
9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.14, 11.5.2.16

Practical tip: focus indicator

The focus indicator must have sufficient contrast, and should be designed consistently at the same time. With applications that have different background colors, this can be achieved by using a two-color border (e.g. black and 05.15.2023 Page 68 of 317 white) that has sufficient contrast against each background. A two-color focus indicator is also useful with control elements on gradients or graphics.

For example: Two buttons on a color gradient from white to black. The top button is currently focused. The focus indicator consists of a black border (inside) and a white border (outside), which means that it always easy to see, regardless of the background color. It is the standard focus frame offered by Google Chrome.

Figure 13: Two-color focus indicator

Text cursor

Online betrachten

Synonyms: Cursor

See also: Use of the keyboard, Focus indicator

The text cursor displays the position in an input field (see DIN EN ISO 9241-161: 8.8). The text cursor is typically displayed by a vertical line at the point at which the text is entered, edited or deleted.

Presentation

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
195User preferencesThe application must adopt the text cursor setting from the platform software and/or provide a mode in which this setting is adopted.

Note: If the settings of the platform software are not applied automatically, the corresponding mode must be explained in the information on accessibility.

MustEN 301 549:
11.7, 12.1.1

Operation

Use of the keyboard: text cursor

The change of the focus indicator between the elements is described at the input field and multi-line input field elements. By default, the navigation within the input fields takes place with the arrow keys.

Use of the pointing device: text cursor

ActionkeyClassification
Placing the focusleft clickrequired

Programming/interfaces

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
196Desktop: PositionThe position of the text cursor must be communicated to the Accessibility API.MustEN 301 549:
11.5.2.13
197Desktop: OperationIt must be possible to position the text cursor with assistive technology (see using the keyboard).MustEN 301 549:
11.5.2.14

Required field label

Online betrachten

Synonyms: Required form fields, required input, required

See also: error message, label, element status

A required field label is a visual indicator for form fields that have to be filled out. In this respect, for example, an asterisk (*) can be used to indicate that a form field has to be filled out.

Presentation

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
198PresentationRequired fields must be visually perceptible.

Note 1: The optional fields can also be labeled instead of the required fields.

Note 2: If the required fields are also identifiable from the context without a label (e.g. on a login page with two input fields for the user name and password), then the required field label can be omitted.

Note 3: Required fields must be labeled consistently in the application.

Note 4: In the case of Gruppen of radio buttons and check boxes, the required field label should be situated at the label of the group insofar as a random element of the group has to be selected.

MustEN 301 549:
9.3.3.2, 11.3.3.2
199ContrastThe required field label in graphic form must have a contrast ratio of at least 3:1 with respect to the background. The required field label in text form must have a contrast ratio of at least 4.5:1 with respect to the background.MustEN 301 549:
9.1.4.3, 11.1.4.3, 9.1.4.11, 11.1.4.11
200ColorRequired fields should not only be labeled with the use of color (e.g. a different border color).

Note: Color can be used as an additional means of the required field label.

MustEN 301 549:
9.1.4.1, 11.1.4.1

Programming/interfaces

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
201StatusThe required field status must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Accessibility API).

Note 1: The programmatic required field labeling should take place using an attribute of the programming language provided for this purpose or using the textual supplement in the Accessible Name of the form field (e.g. asterisk). The redundant programmatic marking of the required fields with attribute and supplement in the Accessible Name label should be avoided.

Note 2: If filling out a form field group is labeled as required without the necessity for every field of the group to be filled out, the programmatic required field labeling should only take place at the group and not at every field. In this case, care must be taken to ensure that the required field label of the group is communicated correctly to the Accessibility API.

MustEN 301 549:
9.1.3.1, 11.1.3.1, 9.3.3.2, 11.3.3.2, 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2

Practical tip: required field label

Required fields can be labeled with a corresponding textual supplement, such as “required field” or “required”. If the majority of the fields are required, the fields that do not need to be filled out can alternatively be labeled with “optional”, for example.

The required fields can also be marked with a symbol. The asterisk (“*”) has established itself for this purpose, in which it can be assumed, at least in specialist applications, that it is known to all users. If another character is used, its meaning should be explained at the beginning of the form.

Practical tip: programmatic label of required fields in Web applications

Screen reader output

Note: A required field which is not filled out but which has been marked with required is in the incorrect status due to the HTML specification, and is therefore output by the screen readers as “invalid entry” and/or “invalid”. The problem does not occur when using aria-required.

HTML

Required fields can be marked with the required attribute..

Therefore, when using required, the following should be considered:

Note: In the practical tip on radio buttons and checkboxes , the particularities regarding their marking up as required fields are explained.

Further information 4.10.5.3.4 The required attribute - HTML Standard (whatwg.org)

ARIA

Required fields can be marked with the aria-required=true attribute.

Further information: aria-required property - Accessible Rich Internet Applications (WAI-ARIA) 1.2 (w3.org) (External Link)

Text elements

Online betrachten

Table of contents

Headings

Online betrachten

Synonyme: Section heading, main heading, heading

See also: font, text, label, titel, group

Headings are used to outline sections of text. They describe the content of each section of text.

Presentation

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
202ContrastHeadings must have a contrast ratio of at least 4.5:1 and/or 3:1.

Note: From a font size of 24 px (and/or 18.5 px in the case of bold font), a contrast ratio of at least 3:1 is sufficient.

MustEN 301 549:
9.1.4.3, 11.1.4.3
204LabelThe heading must be expressive.

Note: To achieve this, the heading should describe the following section concisely and unambiguously.

MustEN 301 549:
9.2.4.6, 11.2.4.6
205LabelAn image of text may not be used for the heading, unless its text content can be adapted to the user preferences (font style, font size, font color, background color).MustEN 301 549:
9.1.4.5, 11.1.4.5.1
206StructureSections of text should be subdivided with headings.ShouldWCAG 2.1: 2.4.10 (AAA)
207HierarchyThe hierarchy of headings must correspond to the logical structure of the page.

Note: As a rule, the page should have a main heading with the highest hierarchy. Section headings should be organized in the correct hierarchical way without skipping a hierarchy level.

MustEN 301 549: 9.1.3.1, 11.1.3.1.1
208Focus visibilityIf the heading receives the focus, the focus indicator must be visible (see Focus indicator).MustEN 301 549:
9.2.4.7, 11.2.4.7

Operation

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
209Use of the keyboardIn applications that do not support the virtual cursor, it must be possible to access and exit the heading with the keyboard (see Use of the keyboard table).

Note: If the application contains several headings that receive the keyboard focus, there should be an operating mode in which only the interactive elements receive the focus to avoid unnecessary navigation steps for sighted keyboard users.

MustEN 301 549:
9.1.1.1, 11.1.1.1

Use of the keyboard: heading (in an application without a virtual cursor)

AktionTasteKlassifizierung
Focusing the headingTABrequired
Exiting the headingTABrequired

Programming/interfaces

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
210RoleThe “heading” role and its hierarchy level must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549:
9.1.3.1, 11.1.3.1, 11.5.2.5
211HierarchyThe hierarchy of headings must correspond to the logical structure of the page.

Note: In this context, the maximum number of hierarchy levels should be considered (desktop applications: typically 9, Web applications: 6).

MustEN 301 549:
9.1.3.1, 11.1.3.1
212Desktop: PositionThe size and position of the heading must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Focus indicator).MustEN 301 549:
11.5.2.5, 11.5.2.13

Practical tip: headings in Web applications

Screenreader output

HTML

Headings are marked with the HTML elements <h1>, <h2>, <h3>, <h4>, <h5> and <h6>. In this respect, the following should be taken into account:

Headings can be grouped within the <hgroup> elements along with paragraphs (<p>-Element) to specify a caption or an alternative heading, for example. This grouping is not perceptible with any of the screen readers for Windows, i.e. the content of the <p> element is output as normal text, as according to the “HTML Accessibility API Mappings”, the <hgroup> element does not have any semantics.

Further information: 4.3.6 The h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, and h6 elements - HTML Standard (whatwg.org) , 4.3.11 Headings and outlines - HTML Standard (whatwg.org) (External Link), Headings | Web Accessibility Initiative (WAI) | W3C

ARIA

If the heading is not implemented with the HTML elements, it is also necessary to take account of the following:

Further information: heading role - Accessible Rich Internet Applications (WAI-ARIA) 1.2 (w3.org) (External Link)

Label

Online betrachten

Synonyms: Designation, form field label, name, accessible name

See also: font, text, graphik, form, group, description, error message, required field label

Labels are used for the identification of control elements (see DIN EN ISO 9241-161: 8.21).

A label consists of a short, descriptive text or an expressive graphic and/or a combination of text and graphic. The label can be situated inside the element or adjacent to the element which is labeled.

Figure 14: Label before an input field
Figure 15: Labels and a group label placed to the right of check boxes

Presentation

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
213ContrastText labels must have a contrast ratio of at least 4.5:1 with respect to the background.

Note 1: With large font (from 24 px and/or from 18.7 px in the case of bold font), a contrast ratio of at least 3:1 is sufficient.

Note 2: The contrast requirements also apply when receiving keyboard focus (keyboard focus indicator) or hovering with a pointing device.

MustEN 301 549:
9.1.4.3, 11.1.4.3
214ContrastText labels must have a contrast ratio of at least 7:1 with respect to the background.

Note: With large font (from 24 px and/or from 18.7 px in the case of bold font), a contrast ratio of at least 4.5:1 is sufficient.

ShouldWCAG 2.1: 1.4.6 (AAA)
215ContrastGraphic labels must have a contrast ratio of at least 3:1. This applies to the contrast with the background as well as to the areas of content within the graphic. This also applies when the form field has focus and when hovering with a pointing device.

Note: This does not apply to layout graphics, i.e. if an equivalent text label exists in addition to the graphic

MustEN 301 549:
9.1.4.11, 11.1.4.11
216Color codingIf information is conveyed using the color of the label (e.g. the form field is a required field or filled out incorrectly), this information must also be conveyed in another way, e.g. in text form.MustEN 301 549:
9.1.4.1, 11.1.4.1, 9.3.3.1, 11.3.3.1
217ResizingIt must be possible to scale the label by up to 200%. During the scaling, the label must remain completely visible and may not obscure other areas of the page or be obscured by them.MustEN 301 549:
9.1.4.4, 11.1.4.4.1
218ResizingThe label must be displayed in full without horizontal scrolling at a screen width of 320 px.MustEN 301 549:
9.1.4.10, 11.1.4.10
219GraphicThe label may not contain any (images of text) , unless they are adaptable to the user requirements (font style, font size, font color, background color).MustEN 301 549:
9.1.4.5, 11.1.4.5.1
220GraphicThe label should not contain any images of text.ShouldWCAG 2.1: 1.4.9 (AAA)
221ComprehensibilityThe label must be expressive (see Practical tip: special characters).).

Note 1: To achieve this, the label should be concise and unambiguous.

Note 2: In addition to the concise label, more detailed descriptions can be used.

Note 3: If an element only has graphic label, a tooltip should be provided with the text alternative.

MustEN 301 549:
9.2.4.6, 11.2.4.6, 9.3.3.2, 11.3.3.2
222ComprehensibilityThe use of abbreviations in labels should be avoided. Alternatively, a mechanism should be available for displaying the unabbreviated form and/or the meaning of the abbreviation.ShouldWCAG 2.1: 3.1.4 (AAA)
223ComprehensibilityThe label should be in the application language.ShouldWCAG 2.1: 3.1.3 (AAA), 3.1.5 (AAA)
224ContextA visual label must be available on every form field. Alternatively, the purpose of the form field must be clear from the context (e.g. unlabeled search field with “Search” button; unlabeled form fields in a table with expressive column and line headings).MustEN 301 549:
9.3.3.2, 11.3.3.2
225PositionThe form field label should be located to the left or above the form field, except for the case of radio buttons and check boxes.

Note: In exceptional cases, the label can also enclose the form field (e.g. “Reminder in [input field] days”). However, we recommend that the label is formulated so that it can only be located in front of the form field.

ShouldDIN EN ISO 9241-143: 5.3.4, 5.3.8
DIN EN ISO 9241-125: 5.1.14
226PositionThe form field labeling of radio buttons and checkboxes should take place to the right of the form field.ShouldDIN EN ISO 9241-143: 5.3.8
DIN EN ISO 9241-125: 5.1.14
227Web: ConsistencyLabels must be used consistently within the application.MustEN 301 549: 9.3.2.4
228Desktop: ConsistencyLabels should be used consistently within the application.ShouldWCAG 2.1: 3.2.4 (AA)
229AnimationThe label may not sparkle, flash or be visually changed in any other way (see Animation).MustEN 301 549:
9.2.3.1, 11.2.3.1, 9.2.2.2, 11.2.2.2
230AnimationThe label should be displayed all the time and should not be animated during operation.

Note: This means that the label should not be displayed within a form field to become invisible or be positioned adjacent to the field during inputting.

ShouldWCAG 2.1: 2.3.3 (AAA)
231Keyboard shortcut, shortcut keysIf an control element has a keyboard shortcut or a shortcut key, it should be visible on the label.

Note: For the identification of a shortcut key, the corresponding letter can be underlined. Keyboard shortcuts can be displayed behind the label or in a tooltip.

ShouldDIN EN ISO 9241-171: 9.3.11
232Focus visibilityIf the label receives the keyboard focus, the focus indicator must be visible (see Focus indicator).MustEN 301 549:
9.2.4.7, 11.2.4.7

Use of the pointing device: labeling

ActionKeyClassification
Enabling of the element if the label is situated in the elementLeft click on the labelRequired
Enabling of the element if the label is situated adjacent to the elementLeft click on the label

Note: This is especially true for form fields with a small click area, such as radio buttons and check boxes.

Recommended

Programming/interfaces

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
233LabelEach control element must have an Accessible Name which is communicated to the Accessibility API.

Note 1: This can be achieved if the control element

  • is given a text label,

  • is linked to the visual text label adjacent to the element, or

  • if a graphical label in the element receives an alternative text.

Note 2: This also applies if the element has no visual label because its purpose is inherent to the context.

The Accessible Name should not change during operation. Exception: If the value or status of a control element is communicated as part of the Accessible Name because the value or status cannot be communicated programmatically, the Accessible Name may change. A button can therefore have the label “Text color red” or “Text color green” and/or “Show information” or “Hide information” (see Practical tip: Accessibility API).

MustEN 301 549:
9.1.4.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5
234Desktop: LabelIf the visual label is not situated in the control element, the label must be programmatically linked to the control element.MustEN 301 549:
11.5.2.8
235Desktop: LabelIf the visual label is not situated in the control element, the label should be programmatically linked to the control element.ShouldDIN EN ISO 9241-143: 5.3.2
236LabelIf the purpose of a form element is not clearly identifiable from its Accessible Name, but is clear to sighted users from the visual context, the visual information must be communicated to the assistive technology
  • as part of the Accessible Name,

  • as (part of) the Accessible Name of a group or

  • as (part of) the Accessible Description.

MustEN 301 549:
9.1.3.1, 11.1.3.1
237LabelIf information is conveyed on the basis of the visual design of the label such as the color, font style or font size (e.g. the form field is a required field or incorrectly filled out), this information must be communicated to the Accessibility API programmatically or in text form.MustEN 301 549:
9.1.3.1, 11.1.3.1, 9.3.3.1, 11.3.3.1
238GraphicFor a graphical label only, the Accessible Name must contain an equivalent text alternative which describes the function.

Note: Graphical labels include characters and letters with a graphic meaning such as “x” (for Close), “?” (for Help) or “>” (for Continue).

MustEN 301 549:
9.1.1.1, 11.1.1.1
239GraphicIf a visual label contains both text and a graphic and the graphic does not communicate any additional information, the graphic must be marked as a layout graphic so that it is ignored by the assistive technology.MustEN 301 549:
9.1.1.1, 11.1.1.1
240ComprehensibilityThe Accessible Name must be expressive.

Note 1: To achieve this, the Accessible Name should be concise and unambiguous..

Note 2: In addition to the concise Accessible Name, more detailed Accessible Descriptions can be used.

MustEN 301 549:
9.2.4.6, 11.2.4.6, 9.3.3.2, 11.3.3.2
241ComprehensibilityAbbreviations in the Accessible Name should be avoided. Alternatively, a mechanism should be available for displaying the unabbreviated form and/or the meaning of the abbreviation with assistive technology.ShouldWCAG 2.1: 3.1.4 (AAA)
242Web: Change of languageIf the Accessible Name contains foreign-language terms, the change of language must be marked.

Note: The Accessible Name should contain only words in the application language. Even if the change of language is marked, in the case of Accessible Names of interactive elements, it is often the case that it is not output correctly by the assistive technology.

ShouldWCAG 2.1: 3.1.4 (AAA)
243Desktop: ComprehensibilityThe Accessible Name should contain only words in the application language.

Note: In the applications in which marking up the change of language is possible, the language of foreign-language Accessible Names should be marked accordingly.

ShouldWCAG 2.1: 3.1.2 (AA)
244ConsistencyThe visual label must match or be included in the Accessible Name.

Note 1: This only applies if the visible label consists of a text label or an image of text.

Note 2: If an element with a purely graphical label has a tooltip which contains a label in text form, then the tooltip text should match or be contained in the Accessible Name.

MustEN 301 549:
11.2.5.3
245Keyboard shortcut, shortcut keysIf a control element has a visible keyboard shortcut or a shortcut key, this must be communicated to the Accessibility API.

Note: This should take place using the corresponding characteristic of the API. If this is not possible, the keyboard shortcut or the shortcut key can be communicated as part of the Accessible Name or the Accessible Description.

MustEN 301 549:
11.1.3.1

Practical tip: labeling in Web applications

Screenreader output

Please note:

HTML

In HTML, the labeling method depends on the element type:

Further information: 4.10.4 The label element - HTML Standard (whatwg.org), Providing Accessible Names and Descriptions | APG | WAI | W3C, Labeling Controls | Web Accessibility Initiative (WAI) | W3C, 4. Accessible Name and Description Computation - HTML Accessibility API Mappings 1.0 (w3.org)

ARIA

In ARIA, it is possible to communicate labels with the attributes aria-labelledby and aria-label.

Further information: aria-label property - Accessible Rich Internet Applications (WAI-ARIA) 1.2 (w3.org) (External Link), aria-labelledby property - Accessible Rich Internet Applications (WAI-ARIA) 1.2 (w3.org) (External Link), caption role - Accessible Rich Internet Applications (WAI-ARIA) 1.2 (w3.org) (External Link)

General information

Description

Online betrachten

Synonyms: Note, Help, Operation note, Input instruction, Instruction, Accessible Description

See also: font, text, label, error message, required field label, tooltip, help and support

A description contains additional information on the use and operation of the application (see DIN EN ISO 9241-161: 8.19).

Descriptions can refer to a control element, an area, a screen, or to the entire application. A description consists of an explanatory text, a graphic or a combination of text and graphic.

Descriptions can be

Presentation

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
246ContrastText descriptions must have a contrast ratio of at least 4.5:1 with respect to the background.

Note: With large font (from 24 px and/or from 18.7 px in the case of bold font), a contrast ratio of at least 3:1 is sufficient.

MustEN 301 549:
9.1.4.3, 11.1.4.3
247ContrastText descriptions should have a contrast ratio of at least 7:1.

Hinweis: Note: With large font (from 24 px and/or from 18.7 px in the case of bold font), a contrast ratio of at least 4.5:1 is sufficient.

ShouldWCAG 2.1: 1.4.6 (AAA)
248ContrastGraphic descriptions must have a contrast ratio of at least 3:1. This applies to the contrast with the background as well as to the areas of content within the graphic.MustEN 301 549:
9.1.4.11, 11.1.4.11
249ResizingIt must be possible to scale the description by up to 200%. During the scaling, the description must remain completely visible and may not obscure other areas of the page or be obscured by them.MustEN 301 549:
9.1.4.4, 11.1.4.4
250ResizingThe description must be displayed in full without horizontal scrolling at a screen width of 320 px.MustEN 301 549:
9.1.4.10, 11.1.4.10
251ComprehensibilityIf additional instructions are required to be able to understand the operation, descriptions with operating instructions must be displayed.

Note: Descriptions are not necessary if the labels of the control elements are sufficient. Descriptions may be necessary, for example, for an input field at which a particular input format is required.

MustEN 301 549:
9.3.3.2, 11.3.3.2
252ComprehensibilityThe description should be formulated in the application language.ShouldEN 301 549: 9.3.1.2
253Reference to sensory propertiesInformation in the description which relates to the elements of the application must not refer exclusively to their sensory properties.

Note: Therefore, for example, a button should not be described by its appearance or position, but by its label.

MustEN 301 549:
9.1.3.3, 11.1.3.3
254PositionThe descriptions should be positioned so that they can be unambiguously associated with the elements or areas to which they refer.

Note: Descriptions for a form field, for example, can be displayed to the right or below the field.

ShouldDIN EN ISO 9241-125: 5.1.1, 5.1.14
255AnimationThe description may not sparkle, flash or be visually changed in any other way (see Animation).MustEN 301 549:
EN 301 549: 9.2.3.1, 11.2.3.1, 9.2.2.2, 11.2.2.2
256Focus visibilityIf the description receives the keyboard focus, the focus indicator must be visible (see Focus indicator).MustEN 301 549:
9.2.4.7, 11.2.4.7

Operation

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
257Use of the keyboardIn applications that do not support the virtual cursor, the descriptions must receive the keyboard focus as long as the description is not linked with a keyboard-focusable element.

Note: If the application contains several descriptions that receive the keyboard focus, there should be an operating mode in which only the interactive elements receive the focus to avoid unnecessary navigation steps for sighted keyboard users..

MustEN 301 549:
9.1.3.1, 11.1.3.1
258Use of the keyboardIf the description is not permanently visible, it must also be possible to display it with the use of the keyboard.

Note: This applies regardless of how the description is displayed. Frequent variants include:

  • button to show an area with the description,

  • button to show a tooltip with the description,

  • area or tooltip which is shown when hovering using a pointing device or when focusing,

  • display using a keyboard shortcut.

MustEN 301 549:
9.2.1.1, 11.2.1.1
259Use of the keyboardIf the description contains control elements, they must be operable with the keyboard.

Note: This also applies if the description is displayed in a tooltip.

MustEN 301 549:
9.2.1.1, 11.2.1.1
260Use of the keyboardIf a description is displayed in an automatically-displayed tooltip, the following must be met:
  • It must be possible to close the tooltip with the keyboard without moving the keyboard focus away (e.g. with ESC).

  • The tooltip must remain visible until it is explicitly hidden (by moving the keyboard focus away, for example).

Hinweis: Note: This does not apply to tooltips that are shown by the platform software by default.

MustEN 301 549:
9.1.4.13, 11.1.4.13
261Use of the pointing deviceIf a description is displayed in an automatically-displayed tooltip, the following must be met:
  • It must be possible to close the tooltip with the pointing device without moving the pointing device away.

  • It must be possible to move over the tooltip with the pointing device without the tooltip being hidden.

  • The tooltip must remain visible until it is explicitly hidden (by moving the pointing device away, for example).

Note: This does not apply to tooltips that are shown by the platform software by default.

MustEN 301 549:
9.1.4.13, 11.1.4.13

Programming/interfaces

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
262RoleIf the description receives the keyboard focus, an appropriate role (e.g. “text”) must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549:
9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5
263Desktop: DescriptionAny available visual description that refers to a keyboard-focusable control element must be communicated to the Accessibility API as an Accessible Description of this element.

Note: In this respect, it does not matter whether this description is permanently visible or is only displayed when hovering with a pointing device or when receiving the keyboard focus.

MustEN 301 549:
9.1.3.1, 11.1.3.1, 11.5.2.5
263Desktop: DescriptionIf the description is long or contains structured content, the description should be given keyboard focus and its content can be read using the virtual cursorShouldEN 301 549: 9.1.3.1, 11.1.3.1
264GraphicIf the description contains a graphic that contains content, its equivalent text alternative must be communicated to the Accessibility API.MustEN 301 549:
9.1.1.1, 11.1.1.1

Practical tip: descriptions in Web applications

Screenreader output

Please note:

HTML

In HTML, most of the control elements can only be given a description using the title attribute. However, the title attribute is not accessible for the following reasons:

In HTML, in addition to the title attribute, a few elements can be given a description using another method:

This is designed to ensure, however, that the visible label is at least perceptible by the assistive technology as a description if it is not output as a label (Accessible Name). As the visible label is required to correspond to or at least be contained in the Accessible Name (EN 301 549: 9.2.5.3), none of the three methods should be used for marking up a description.

Further informationen: 3.2.6.1 The title attribute - HTML Standard (whatwg.org) (External Link), Providing Accessible Names and Descriptions | APG | WAI | W3C, 4. Accessible Name and Description Computation - HTML Accessibility API Mappings 1.0 (w3.org)

ARIA

In ARIA, it is possible to communicate descriptions with the attributes aria-describedby and aria-description.

Additional ARIA attributes can be used for the communication of further information to the Accessibility API that has a descriptive character, but is not a description (Accessible Description):

Please note: Although the aria-roledescription attribute sounds as though it could be used to describe the role of the element, this is not the case. With aria-roledescription , the role of the element is overwritten, which means that the attribute should be used with caution.

Further informations: aria-describedby property - Accessible Rich Internet Applications (WAI-ARIA) 1.2 (w3.org) (External Link), aria-description property - Accessible Rich Internet Applications (WAI-ARIA) 1.3 (w3c.github.io) (External Link)

General information

Text

Online betrachten

Synonyms: Continuous text

See also: font, label, description, error message, graphic

The text is used to convey information in writing. Among others, text can contain headings, links, lists und Graphics enthalten.

Presentation

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
265ContrastText must have a contrast ratio of at least 4.5:1 with respect to the background.

Note: With large font (from 24 px and/or from 18.7 px in the case of bold font), a contrast ratio of at least 3:1 is sufficient.

MustEN 301 549:
9.1.4.3, 11.1.4.3
266ContrastText should have a contrast ratio of at least 7:1 with respect to the background.

Note: With large font (from 24 px and/or from 18.7 px in the case of bold font), a contrast ratio of at least 4.5:1 is sufficient.

ShouldWCAG 2.1: 1.4.6 (AAA)
267Color codingIf information in the text is conveyed using color, this information must also be conveyed in another way, e.g. in text form.MustEN 301 549:
9.1.4.1, 11.1.4.1
268ResizingIt must be possible to scale the text by up to 200%. During the scaling, the text must remain completely visible and may not obscure other areas of the page or be obscured by them.

Note 1: It is permissible for areas of text to have to be scrolled through vertically after the scaling so that they are displayed in full.

Note 2: The application can offer its own zoom function. Alternatively, the settings of the platform software can be applied.

MustEN 301 549:
9.1.4.4, 11.1.4.4
269ResizingThe text must be displayed in full without horizontal scrolling at a screen width of 320 px.MustEN 301 549:
9.1.4.10, 11.1.4.10
270graphicThe text may not contain any Schriftgrafiken unless they are adaptable to the user requirements (font style, font size, font color, background color).MustEN 313 549:
9.1.4.5, 11.1.4.5.1
271GraphicThe text should not contain any images of text.ShouldWCAG 2.1: 1.4.9 (AAA)
272User preferencesIf the text spacing can be adjusted within the application, the operation and perceptibility of the application is maintained.

Note: This applies to the following spacing:

  • line spacing up to 1.5 times the font size,

  • paragraph spacing up to 2 times the font size,

  • character spacing up to 0.12 times the font size,

  • word spacing up to 0.16 times the font size.

MustEN 301 549:
9.1.4.12. 11.1.4.12
273User preferencesThe application must accept the font style, size, and color settings from the platform software or provide a mode in which the settings are applied.

Note 1: If the settings of the platform software are not applied automatically, the corresponding mode must be explained in the information on accessibility.

Note 2: The application can also offer a mode in which users can choose their preferences for the font style, size, color and any other possible font attributes directly in the application.

MustEN 301 549:
11.7, 12.1.1
274ComprehensibilityUnusual or unintelligible words should be avoided or explained.ShouldWCAG 2.1: 3.1.3 (AAA)
275ComprehensibilityWords whose meaning depends on their pronunciation should be avoided if the meaning is not apparent from the context. Alternatively, their meaning or pronunciation should be explained.ShouldWCAG 2.1: 3.1.6 (AAA)
276ComprehensibilityText content should be formulated simply enough to be understood by users who have a lower secondary education level. If this is not possible, an additional comprehensible alternative should be offered (language version, illustration, abstract, text in simple language).ShouldWCAG 2.1: 3.1.5 (AAA)
277ComprehensibilityAbbreviations in the text should be avoided. Alternatively, a mechanism should be available for displaying the unabbreviated form and/or the meaning of the abbreviation.

Note: This does not apply to commonly known abbreviations such as “USA” or “e.g.”.

ShouldWCAG 2.1: 3.1.4 (AAA)
278ComprehensibilityThe text should be formulated in the application language.ShouldWCAG 2.1: 3.1.3 (AAA), 3.1.5 (AAA)
279ReadabilityText blocks should not be larger than 80 characters or it is possible to adjust the width.ShouldWCAG 2.1: 1.4.8 (AAA)
279ReadabilityText blocks should not be justified or it is possible to adjust the orientation.ShouldWCAG 2.1: 1.4.8 (AAA)
280ReadabilityThe spacing between lines of text should be at least 1.5 times larger than the font size, and the spacing between paragraphs of text should be at least 1.5 times larger than the spacing between lines, or it is possible to adjust the text spacing.ShouldWCAG 2.1: 1.4.8 (AAA)
281AnimationThe text may not sparkle, flash or be visually changed in any other way (see Animation).MustEN 301 549:
9.2.3.1, 11.2.3.1, 9.2.2.2, 11.2.2.2
282AnimationThe text should be displayed all the time and should not be animated during operation.ShouldWCAG 2.1: 2.3.3 (AAA)
283FokussichtbarkeitIf the text receives the keyboard focus, the focus indicator must be visible (see Focus indicator).MustEN 301 549:
9.2.4.7, 11.2.4.7

Operation

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
284Use of the keyboardIn applications that do not support the virtual cursor, the text must receive the keyboard focus (see Practical tip: text).

Note 1: This does not apply if the text is associated with a keyboard-focusable element and therefore serves as a label or desription of the element.

Note 2: If the technology to be used is not to allow text to be focused, other elements must be used for the presentation of text that can receive the focus, such as read-only input fields.

MustEN 301 549:
11.1.3.1
285Use of the keyboardIf the text contains control elements, these must be operable with the keyboard.MustEN 301 549:
9.2.1.1, 11.2.1.1

Use of the keyboard: text (in an application that does not support the virtual cursor)

ActionKeyClassification
Focusing textTABRequired
Exiting textTABRequired
Navigating within textARROW KEYSReommended

Programming/interfaces

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
286RoleA role for “text” must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 9.1.3.1, 11.1.3.1, 11.5.2.6
287TextThe text content must be communicated to the Accessibility API.MustEN 301 549:
9.1.3.1, 11.1.3.1, 11.5.2.10
288TextIf the text contains structured contents (such as headings, lists or tables), these must be communicated to the Accessibility API in structured form.

Note: The specific requirements concerning headings, lists and tables can be found in the respective section.

MustEN 301 549:
9.1.3.1, 11.1.3.1, 11.5.2.6
289TextIf information is conveyed on the basis of the visual design of text, such as the color, font style or font size, this information must be communicated to the Accessibility API programmatically or in text form.MustEN 301 549:
9.1.3.1, 11.1.3.1, 11.5.2.10
290Web: Change of languageIf the text contains foreign-language terms, the change of language must be marked.MustEN 301 549: 9.3.1.2
291Desktop: ComprehensibilityThe text should contain only words in the application language.

Note: In the applications in which marking up the change of language is possible, the language of foreign-language sections of text should be marked accordingly.

MustEN 301 549:
11.1.1.1
292GraphicContent-bearing graphics in the text must have an equivalent alternative text.MustEN 301 549:
9.1.1.1, 11.1.1.1
293GraphicIf a text contains a decorative graphic, the graphic must be marked as a layout graphic so that it is ignored by the assistive technology.MustEN 301 549:
9.1.1.1, 11.1.1.1
294Desktop: size and positionThe size and position of the text must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Fokusindikator).MustEN 301 549:
11.5.2.5, 11.5.2.10, 11.5.2.13

Practical tip: text

Application that does not support the virtual cursor

Longer texts (guideline: 80 to 400 characters) without a text structure (i.e., continuous text only, without lists, tables, headings, etc.) in applications that do not support the virtual cursor, should

Long texts (from approx. 400 characters) or texts with structure (e.g. lists, tables, headings) should

Applications with several TAB steps on text and other non-operable elements should have a mode to disable such unnecessary navigation steps for sighted keyboard users. This mode and its enabling should be described in the accessibility instructions.

Application that supports the virtual cursor

If copying individual text content in the application context may be relevant, this should also be possible with the keyboard. The following requirements must then be met for the text content:

To accomplish this, read-only input fields can be used.

If the entire content of a section of text must be copyable, a button for the copying of the text content can be implemented. Pressing the button should result in the text being copied to the clipboard.

Applications with several TAB steps on copyable pieces of text should have a mode for disabling such navigation steps. This mode and its enabling should be described in the accessibility instructions.

Graphical elements

Online betrachten

Table of content

Graphic

Online betrachten

Synonyms: Graphical element, icon, image, illustration, content-bearing graphic, pixel graphic, vector graphic, image

See also: Layout graphic

Graphics are used to convey information in a visual, non-textual format.

Note: Additional requirements concerning graphics which communicate the status, value, role or labeling of an element are described at the respective element and/or in the corresponding sections (e.g. element status, label).

Presentation

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
295ContrastAll content of graphics must have a contrast ratio of at least 3:1. This applies to the contrast of the graphic with the background as well as to the contrasts within the graphic (between neighboring areas) insofar as they are relevant to the conveying of the information.

Exceptions:
  • disabled elements,

  • graphics that cannot be changed without distorting them, such as logos, flags, screenshots, heat maps or medical charts,

  • graphics that have a visible and equivalent text alternative.

Note: If graphics do not have sufficient contrast and are classified as one of the exceptions, they must not be used as labels for control elements or convey relevant information.

MustEN 301 549:
9.1.4.11, 11.1.4.11
296Color codingIf information is conveyed using different colors within a graphic or between different graphics, then all colors (each with respect to the others) must have a contrast ratio of at least 3:1 (see Practical tip: color coding).

Note: This applies if the colors themselves have no meaning, but only the color difference does.

ShouldEN 301 549: 9.1.4.1, 11.1.4.1
297Color codingIf information is conveyed using a particular color within a graphic, this information must also be conveyed in another way (see practical tip: color coding).

Note: This applies when the color itself has a meaning, such as “green” for correct and “red” for incorrect.

ShouldEN 301 549: 9.1.4.1, 11.1.4.1
298ContrastGraphics should be clearly visible when using Windows Contrast Adjustment (see Practical tip: contrast adjustment).ShouldEN 301 549:
11.7
299ContrastGraphics should not be used as background graphics for text, as this affects their readability.

Note: This can lead to insufficient contrast, especially when users adjust the text color or font size according to their requirements.

ShouldEN 301 549:
11.7
300TextImages of text may not be used unless their text content can be adapted to the user requirements (font style, font size, font color, background color).

Exception: Logos
MustEN 301 549:
9.1.4.5, 11.1.4.5.1.1
301Alternative textComplex graphics must have a detailed description in text form.

Note 1: The detailed description should either be displayed at the graphic, or it should be possible to show it or access it at the graphic using a control element.

Note 2: The complex graphic itself must have a concise alternative text. It is recommended that this makes reference to the detailed description.

MustEN 301 549:
9.1.1.1, 11.1.1.1
302AnimationThe graphic may not sparkle, flash or be visually changed in any other way (see Animation).MustEN 301 549:
11.2.3.1, 9.2.2.2, 11.2.2.2
303Focus visibilityIf the graphic receives the keyboard focus, the focus indicator must be visible (see Focus indicator).MustEN 301 549:
9.2.4.7, 11.2.4.7

Operation

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
304Use of the keyboardIn applications that do not support the virtual cursor, it must be possible to access and exit the graphic with the keyboard (see Use of the keyboard table, below).
Exception: If the graphic serves as a label for a control element or conveys its role, status or value, the control element should receive the keyboard focus and not the graphic.

Note: If the application contains several graphics, there should be an operating mode in which only the interactive elements receive the focus to avoid unnecessary navigation steps for sighted keyboard users.

MustEN 301 549:
11.1.1.1

Use of the keyboard: graphic

Note: The following requirements only apply if the graphic has to be accessible with the keyboard (see above).

ActionKeyClassification
Focusing graphicTABRequired
Exiting the graphicTABRequired

Use of the pointing device: graphic

ActionKeyClassification
Showing the tooltipHoverRecommended

Programming/interfaces

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
305RoleThe “graphic” role must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 11.5.2.5
306NameThe graphic must have a concise and meaningful alternative text which is communicated to the Accessibility API as an Accessible Name.MustEN 301 549: 9.1.1.1, 11.1.1.1
307DescriptionComplex graphics must be accompanied by a detailed text alternative that describes all the relevant content of the graphic in full.MustEN 301 549: 9.1.1.1, 11.1.1.1
308OperationIn applications that do not support the virtual cursor , it must be possible to access and exit the graphic with the assistive technology.MustEN 301 549: 9.1.1.1, 11.1.1.1
309Desktop: PositionThe size and position of the graphic must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Focus visibility).MustEN 301 549: 11.5.2.5, 11.5.2.13

Practical tip: graphics in Web applications that communicate a role, status, or value

HTML

The HTML standard elements do not have to be considered with regard to the graphics that communicate information about role, status or value, because the corresponding information is automatically communicated correctly by the browser to the Accessibility API.

ARIA

In the case of custom elements that are implemented with ARIA roles and ARIA attributes, the graphics that convey information about the role, status, or value should be marked as layout graphics. Instead, the information should be programmatically communicated, e.g. with the following attributes:

Insofar as no ARIA attribute exists for the relevant information, the information should be communicated in text form as part of the label or description of the element.

Further information: Accessible Rich Internet Applications (WAI-ARIA) 1.2 (w3.org) (External Link)

Practical tip: graphics in Web applications

Screen reader output

HTML and ARIA

The way in which graphics are marked and labeled depends on the method which is used for the presentation of the graphic:

In this case, the following exceptions apply:

Further information: 4.8.3 The img element - HTML Standard (whatwg.org) (External Link), Images Tutorial | Web Accessibility Initiative (WAI) | W3C

Layout graphic

Online betrachten

Synonyms: Decoration graphic, decorative graphic, non-content-bearing graphic, possibly also background graphic

See also: Graphic

Layout graphics serve the purpose of the visual design of the application, but without conveying information. Layout graphics can be purely decorative, for example, or displayed in text form in parallel with information, but without communicating information in addition to the text.

Presentation

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
310ContrastLayout graphics should not be used as background graphics for text, as this affects their readability.

Note: This can lead to insufficient contrast, especially when users adjust the text color or font size according to their requirements.

ShouldEN 301 549: 9.1.4.3, 11.1.4.3, 11.7
311AnimationThe layout graphic may not sparkle, flash or be visually changed in any other way (see Animation).MustEN 301 549:
9.2.3.1, 11.2.3.1, 9.2.2.2, 11.2.2.2

Operation

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
312RoleLayout graphics must not receive the focus.MustEN 301 549: 9.1.1.1, 11.1.1.1

Programming/interfaces

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
313RoleThe layout graphic role must be communicated to the Accessibility API. Alternatively, the layout graphic should not be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549:
11.5.2.5

Practical tip: layout graphics in Web applications

Screen reader output

None

HTML and ARIA

The way in which layout graphics are marked depends on the method which is used for the presentation of the graphic:

Layout graphics should not receive the keyboard focus, i.e. the graphic itself or its descendant elements should not be marked with tabindex or as control elements (e.g. <button>).

Further information: Decorative Images | Web Accessibility Initiative (WAI) | W3C

Progress bar

Online betrachten

Synonyms: Progress display

See also: Slider, graphic

A progress bar shows how far a process has progressed (see DIN EN ISO 9241-161: 8.30). The progress can be displayed in text form, graphically (e.g. progress bar) or as a combination of graphics and text. The presentation of the progress bar changes automatically until the process is complete.

Figure 16: Progress bar

Presentation

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
314ContrastThe progress bar must have a contrast ratio of at least 3:1. This applies to the contrast of the progress bar with the background as well as to the contrasts within the progress bar (between the filled and unfilled bar).MustEN 301 549:
9.1.4.11, 11.1.4.11
315ContrastText in and adjacent to the progress bar must have a contrast ratio of at least 4.5:1.MustEN 301 549:
9.1.4.3, 11.1.4.3
316Focus visibilityIf the progress bar receives the keyboard focus, the focus indicator must be visible (see Focus indicator).MustEN 301 549:
9.2.4.7, 11.2.4.7

Operation

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
317Use of the keyboardIn applications that do not support the virtual cursor, it must be possible to access and exit the progress bar with the keyboard (see Use of the keyboard table).

Exception: The progress bar is marked so that its updates can are perceptible without focusing with the use of assistive technology.

MustEN 301 549:
9.1.1.1, 11.1.1.1
318Use of the keyboardIn applications that support the virtual cursor, the progress bar should not receive the focus.ShouldEN 301 549:
9.4.1.4, 11.2.4.3

Use of the keyboard: progress bar

Note: The following table only applies if the progress bar has to be accessible with the keyboard (see above).

ActionKeyClassification
Focus on the progress barTABRequired
Exit the progress barTABRequired

Programming/interfaces

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
319RoleThe “progress bar” role must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549:
11.5.2.5
320NameThe progress bar must have a concise and expressive Accessible Name.

Note 1: The Accessible Name does not have to be visible.

Note 2: Text that identifies the current process step is not the Accessible Name, but the value of the progress bar.

MustEN 301 549:
9.2.4.6, 11.2.4.6, 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5, 11.5.2.8
321ValueThe value of the progress bar must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Accessibility API).

Note: The value of the progress bar is usually expressed as a percentage. The current process step can also be specified in text form (e.g. the name of the file that is currently being copied).

MustEN 301 549:
11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.7
322Desktop: Value rangeThe minimum and maximum value of the progress bar must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549:
11.5.2.7
323OperationIn applications that do not support the virtual cursor, it must be possible to access and exit the progress bar with assistive technology (see Accessibility API).

Exception: The progress bar is marked so that its updates can are perceptible without focusing with the use of assistive technology.

MustEN 301 549:
9.1.1.1, 11.1.1.1
324Desktop: PositionThe size and position of the progress bar must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Focus indicator).MustEN 301 549:
11.5.2.5, 11.5.2.13

Practical tip: progress bar in Web applications

Screen reader output

Progress bar with value:

Progress bar without value:

Please note:

HTML

The progress bar should be implemented with the HTML element <progress>.

The current value is set with the value attribute. If no value attribute is specified, the progress bar is indeterminate and only indicates that progress is being made without being able to show its extent.

The maximum value is set with the max attribute. It should be noted that its value is imperceptible with many forms of assistive technology. The minimum value is always 0.

The label should be linked to the progress bar with the <label for=ID> element.

The <progress> element can contain different child elements depending on the HTML specification. These are neither visually perceptible nor output by the assistive technology, however.

Further information: 4.10.13 The progress element - HTML Standard (whatwg.org)

ARIA

If the progress bar is not implemented with the HTML element, it is also necessary to take account of the following:

Further information: progressbar role - Accessible Rich Internet Applications (WAI-ARIA) 1.2 (w3.org) (External Link)

Structural elements

Online betrachten

Table of contents

Desktop: Window

Online betrachten

Synonyms: Application window

See also: Title bar, status bar, modal dialog

A window contains all the currently visible elements of the application (see DIN EN ISO 9241-161: 8.51). A window can contain the following elements:

Note: All the requirements concerning the window refer to desktop applications only. For Web applications, the browser is the window. The Web application itself does not contain any windows.

Examples:

Figure 17: Window with title bar, working area and status bar

Presentation

Only those requirements that are directly related to the window are described below. Requirements of elements within the window are described at the respective element.

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
323ResizingAll elements of the window must be perceptible and operable with a font size adjustment of up to 400% (and a resulting display width of 320 px),
  • in the sense that they wrap (i.e. they are shown in several successive rows), or

  • in the sense that the elements that cannot be displayed in a row can be called up using a menu button, or

  • in the sense that they can be scrolled.

MustEN 301 549: 9.1.4.10, 11.1.4.10

Operation

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
324Use of the keyboardIt must be possible to access, operate and exit the window with the keyboard (see Use of the keyboard table, below).

Note: This applies to both the control elements in the window and to the window itself (e.g. scaling and moving the window).

MustEN 301 549: 9.2.1.1, 11.2.1.1, 9.2.1.2, 11.2.1.2

Use of the keyboard: window

ActionKeyClassification
Focusing of the window (first or last focused element)ALT+TABRequired
Exiting the windowALT+TABRequired
Navigating within the windowTABRequired
Opening the system menu (with the window close, move, and scale functions)ALT+SPACERequired
Closing the application windowALT+F4Required
Resizing of the window (Minimized → Normal size → Full screen (if available))WIN+UP ARROWRequired
Minimizing the window (Full screen (if available) → Normal size → Minimized)WIN+DOWN ARROWRequired
Quick navigation between the page areasF6Recommended

Use of the pointing device: window

ActionKeyClassification
Focusing of the windowClicking in the windowRequired
Exiting the windowClick outside the windowRequired
Scaling of the window (if possible)Drag and drop on window borderRequired
Enabling the buttons in the titleLeft clickRequired
Moving the application windowDrag and drop on the title bar Note: If the application is in full screen mode, it automatically switches to normal sizeRequired
Switching between normal size and full screen (if available)Double click on the title barRequired

Programming/interfaces

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
325The window must have a concise and expressive Accessible Name.MustMustEN 301 549:
9.2.4.6, 11.2.4.6, 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5

Tooltip

Online betrachten

Synonyms: Quick info, info tip, mouse over

See also: Description, tooltip, modal dialog

The purpose of a tooltip is to display an additional piece of information dynamically, e.g. the label (with graphic control elements in particular), a description, a keyboard shortcut, or context-specific Help. (see DIN EN ISO 9241-161: 8.50). Tooltips are displayed during the focusing of the corresponding UI element. Tooltips do not contain any interactive elements.

Figure 18: Tooltip

Presentation

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
326VisibilityThe tooltip should be displayed at the respective element.ShouldDIN EN ISO 9241-161: 8.50
327ContrastThe text in the tooltip must have a contrast ratio of at least 4.5:1 with respect to the background.

With large font (from 24 px and/or from 18.7 px in the case of bold font), a contrast ratio of at least 3:1 is sufficient.
MustEN 301 549: 9.1.4.3, 11.1.4.3
328ResizingAll content of the tooltip must be perceptible and operable with a font size adjustment of up to 400% (and a resulting display width of 320 px), in the sense that they wrap and can be vertically scrolled if necessary.MustEN 301 549:
9.1.4.10, 11.1.4.10

Operation

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
329Use of the keyboardIt must be possible to open and close the tooltip with the keyboard (see Use of the keyboard table, below).MustEN 301 549:
9.2.1.1, 11.2.1.1
330Use of the keyboardThe tooltip may not contain control elements as these cannot be keyboard-operable unless an alternative form of operation is documented in the Help option and the application (by keyboard shortcut, for instance).MustEN 301 549:
9.2.1.1, 11.2.1.1
331Use of the keyboardIf the tooltip is shown while navigating with the keyboard, it must be possible to close the tooltip again with the keyboard without moving the keyboard focus away (e.g. with ESC), unless

Note: This does not apply to tooltips that are shown by the platform software by default.

MustEN 301 549:
9.1.4.13, 11.1.4.13
332Use of the keyboardIf the tooltip is shown when navigating with the keyboard, the tooltip must be displayed until the keyboard focus is moved away from the triggering element and/or the tooltip, unless
  • the tooltip was deliberately closed (e.g. with ESC), or

  • the content of the tooltip is no longer valid (e.g. an error message in the input field after entering a correct value).

Note: This does not apply to tooltips that are shown by the platform software by default.

MustEN 301 549:
9.1.4.13, 11.1.4.13
333Use of the pointing deviceIf the tooltip is shown when hovering with a pointing device, it must be possible to hide the tooltip again without moving the pointing device away, unless:
  • the content consists of an error message, or

  • the content only hides white space or decorative non-text content.

Note 1: This does not apply to tooltips that are shown by the platform software by default.

Note 2: The automatically-shown content can be hidden with ESC or clicking on the triggering element, for instance, as long as no other actions are triggered.

MustEN 301 549:
11.1.4.13
334Use of the pointing deviceIf the tooltip is shown when hovering with a pointing device, the tooltip must be displayed until the pointing device is moved away from the triggering element and/or the tooltip, unless
  • the tooltip was deliberately closed (e.g. with ESC), or

  • the content of the tooltip is no longer valid (e.g. an error message in the input field after entering a correct value).

Note: This does not apply to tooltips that are shown by the platform software by default.

MustEN 301 549:
9.1.4.13, 11.1.4.13
335Use of the pointing deviceIf a tooltip is shown when hovering with a pointing device, it must then be possible to move over the tooltip with the pointing device, i.e. the tooltip may not be hidden as soon as the pointing device is no longer positioned over the triggering element.

Note: This does not apply to tooltips that are shown by the platform software by default.

MustEN 301 549:
11.1.4.13

Use of the keyboard: tooltip

ActionKeyClassification
Opening the tooltipNavigating to the elementRequired
Closing the tooltipESCRequired

Use of the pointing device: tooltip

ActionKeyClassification
Opening the tooltipHoveringRequired

Programming/interfaces

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
336NameIf the tooltip contains a description, this must be communicated to the Accessibility API as the Accessible Description (see Description).MustEN 301 549:
9.1.3.1, 11.1.3.1, 11.5.2.5
337NameIf the tooltip contains a label of a graphical element, this should correspond to the Accessible Name or be contained in it.ShouldEN 301 549:
9.2.5.3, 11.2.5.3
338NameThe tooltip should not contain any structured or long text content.

Note: For structured or long text content, a display format should be chosen in which it is possible for the text to be read with the virtual cursor of the screen reader.

ShouldEN 301 549:
9.1.3.1, 11.1.3.1
339Keyboard shortcutIf the tooltip contains a keyboard shortcut for the respective control element, this must be communicated to the Accessibility API.MustEN 301 549:
9.1.3.1, 11.1.3.1

Form

Online betrachten

Synonyms: Form area

See also: Group, error prevention and correction, required field label, authentication, control elements

Forms have the purpose of the input of data. A form contains one or more form elements.

Figure 19: Address input form

Presentation

Only those requirements that are directly related to the form are described below. Requirements regarding interactive elements within the form are described at the respective element.

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
340ResizingAll elements of the form must be perceptible and operable with a font size adjustment of up to 400% (and a resulting display width of 320 px), in the sense that they wrap and do not have to be horizontally scrolled.MustEN 301 549:
9.1.4.10, 11.1.4.10
341Error preventionThe form must be designed in such a way that errors can be prevented and corrected (also see Error prevention and correction und Required field label).MustEN 301 549:
9.3.3.1 bis 9.3.3.4, 11.3.3.1 bis 11.3.3.4
342ComplexityThe form should be clearly designed. The content of complex forms should be grouped programmatically and visually or split into different screens.ShouldDIN EN ISO 9241-125: 5.1.8

Operation

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
343Use of the keyboardIt must be possible to access, operate and exit the interactive elements in the form with the keyboard (see Use of the keyboard table).MustEN 301 549: 9.2.1.1, 11.2.1.1, 9.2.1.2, 11.2.1.2
344Use of the keyboardFrequently used buttons on the form (e. g. the Submit button) should be accessible by keyboard shortcut

The keyboard shortcuts should be documented in the Help option and application.
ShouldDIN EN ISO 9241-171: 9.3.10
345Navigation sequenceThe navigation sequence in the form must be designed so that the contents can be perceived in a meaningful sequence and the control elements can be accessed according to their task-appropriate processing sequence.

Note: This applies, for example, to the Submit button which must receive the focus at the end of the form.

MustEN 301 549:
9.2.4.3, 11.2.4.3
346UpdatesWhen focusing and operating the interactive elements within the form, no unexpected change of context may occur.MustEN 301 549:
9.3.2.1, 11.3.2.1, 9.3.2.2, 11.3.2.2
347Click areaThe click area of the interactive elements in the form should total at least 24 x 24 px (see Use of the pointing device).ShouldWCAG 2.2
Use of the keyboard: form
ActionKeyClassification
Focusing of the form (first element)TABRequired
Desktop: Quick navigation between form areasF6Recommended
Submitting the formENTERRecommended

Programming/interfaces

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
348NameIf the form has a visual label, it must be communicated as an Accessible Name.MustEN 301 549:
9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5
349Desktop: Element hierarchyThe parent / child relationships of the elements within the form must be communicated to the Accessibility API.MustEN 301 549: 11.5.2.9

Toolbar

Online betrachten

Synonyms: Symbols bar, toolbox, command bar tab

See also: Menu, group, menu button

Toolbars serve the grouping of interactive elements for the editing of content or data (see DIN EN ISO 9241-161: 8.49).

A toolbar contains interactive elements (in most cases, buttons or toggle switches) that are grouped visually with a border, for example. The contents of the toolbar are usually arranged horizontally above or below the area, the contents of which are edited with the elements of the toolbar. The elements of the toolbar can be arranged in several lines. For toolbars with several buttons, icons are often used to label the buttons due to space-related constraints.

Figure 20: Toolbar for setting the font style properties

Presentation

Only those requirements that are directly related to the toolbar are described below. Requirements regarding interactive elements within the toolbar are described at the respective element.

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
350ResizingAll elements of the toolbar must be perceptible and operable with a font size adjustment of up to 400% (and a resulting display width of 320 px),
  • in the sense that they wrap (i.e. they are shown in several successive rows), or

  • in the sense that the elements that cannot be displayed in a row can be called up using a menu button, or

  • in the sense that they can be scrolled.

MustEN 301 549:
9.1.4.10, 11.1.4.10
351GroupingTo make the use of the keyboard visible, the toolbar should be designed in such a way that its elements can be identified as belonging together.

Note: This can take place, for example, with a border or position and arrangement.

ShouldDIN EN ISO 9241-125: 5.1.8

Operation

Nr.EigenschaftBeschreibungKlassifizierungReferenz
352Use of the keyboardIt must be possible to access, operate and exit the interactive elements in the toolbar with the keyboard (see Use of the keyboard table, below).MustEN 301 549: 9.2.1.1, 11.2.1.1, 9.2.1.2, 11.2.1.2
353Use of the keyboardThe toolbar may not contain any control elements that are operated by the keys designed for navigation through the toolbar.

Note 1: This can affect input fields and drop-down lists, for example, as they are operated with the arrow keys.

Note 2: Alternatively, keyboard shortcuts must be implemented and documented with which it is possible to exit the control elements.

MustEN 301 549: 11.2.1.1
354Use of the keyboardIf the toolbar is only accessible by keyboard shortcut , keyboard shortcut must be documented in the application and the Help option.MustEN 301 549: 9.2.1.1, 11.2.1.1
355Use of the keyboardThe toolbar should be accessible by keyboard shortcut.

Frequently used interactive elements within the toolbar should also be given a keyboard shortcut.

The keyboard shortcuts should be documented in the Help option and application.
ShouldDIN EN ISO 9241-171: 9.3.10
356UpdatesWhen focusing and operating the interactive elements within the toolbar, no unexpected change of context may occur.MustEN 301 549: 9.3.2.1, 11.3.2.1
357UpdatesChanging the value of the form elements within the toolbar may not cause unexpected changes of context.MustEN 301 549: 9.3.2.2, 11.3.2.2
358UpdatesNo loss of focus may occur when the control elements within the toolbar are enabled.

Note: Therefore, after operating a button, the focus must remain on the button or be placed on the element which is controlled by the button (e.g. input field of a Rich Text Editor or modal dialog which is opened).

MustEN 301 549: 9.2.4.3, 11.2.4.3
359Click areaThe click area of the interactive elements in the toolbar should total at least 24 x 24 px (see Use of the pointing device).ShouldWCAG 2.2

Use of the keyboard: toolbar

ActionKeyClassification
Focusing of the toolbar (first or last focused element)TAB

Note: Alternatively, toolbars can be accessed by the area navigation or by keyboard shortcut.

Required
Exiting the toolbarTAB

Note: Alternatively, toolbars can be exited by the area navigation or an expected change of context after the operation of an element in the toolbar.

Required
Navigating within the toolbar
  • Horizontal toolbar: RIGHT/LEFT ARROW,

  • Vertical toolbar: RIGHT/LEFT/UP/DOWN ARROW,

Required
Quick navigation to the first and/or last element within the toolbarPOS1, ENDRecommended

Programming/interfaces

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
360RoleThe toolbar role must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5
361Desktop: Element hierarchyThe parent / child relationships of the elements within the toolbar must be communicated to the Accessibility API.MustEN 301 549: 11.5.2.9
362OrientationThe orientation of the toolbar (vertical or horizontal) must be communicated to the Accessibility API.MustEN 301 549: 9.2.4.6, 11.2.4.6, 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5, 11.5.2.8
363NameIf the toolbar has a label or description, these must be communicated as the Accessible Name and/or Accessible Description (see Label and Description).

Note: If the page contains several toolbars, they must have a concise and expressive Accessible Name.

MustEN 301 549:
11.2.4.6, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5, 11.5.2.8
364Keyboard shortcutIf the toolbar or control elements within the toolbar have visible keyboard shortcuts, these must be communicated to the Accessibility API.MustEN 301 549:
9.1.3.1, 11.1.3.1
365OperationIt must be possible to access, operate and exit the elements of the toolbar with assistive technology (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.12, 11.5.2.17

Practical tip: toolbar in Web applications

Screen reader output

With TAB navigation:

With the virtual cursor:

HTML

There is no element for toolbars in HTML. Instead of this, buttons and other control elements can be grouped in a list (<menu> and <li>), a labeled region (e.g. <section>) or form field group (<fieldset>, labeled with <legend>). The navigation between the elements then takes place with the TAB key and not the arrow keys. To support the efficient keyboard navigation, it should be possible to skip the region and/or form field group (see practical tip on efficient navigation).

Further information: 4.4.7 The menu element - HTML Standard (whatwg.org) (External Link), 4.3.3 The section element - HTML Standard (whatwg.org) (External Link) 4.10.15 The fieldset element - HTML Standard (whatwg.org)

ARIA

When implementing toolbars, the following should be taken into account:

Further information: toolbar role - Accessible Rich Internet Applications (WAI-ARIA) 1.2 (w3.org) (External Link), Toolbar Pattern | APG | WAI | W3C

Group

Online betrachten

Synonyms: Form field group, group field, grouping, groupbox

See also: Headings, form, toolbar

Groups are used to summarise elements that belong together in terms of their content (see DIN EN ISO 9241-161: 8.15). The group has a label which acts as a group label for the elements it contains.

Figure 21: Grouped radio buttons with a group label

Presentation

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
366ContrastThe visual indicator for the group (e.g. the border around the group) must have a contrast ratio of at least 3:1 to the background or the neighboring colors.

Exceptions:
  • The visual indicator has not been designed with color but spatially (e.g. using the appropriate spacing between the group and the content outside the group).

  • A visual indicator is not necessary because the group encompasses the entire screen, for instance.

MustEN 301 549:
9.1.4.11, 11.1.4.11
367ContrastThe label of the group must have a contrast ratio of at least 4.5:1 with respect to the background.

Note: With large font (from 24 px and/or from 18.7 px in the case of bold font), a contrast ratio of at least 3:1 is sufficient.

MustEN 301 549:
9.1.4.3, 11.1.4.3
368LabelThe label of the group must be expressive.

Note: To achieve this, the label of the group should be concise and unambiguous.

MustEN 301 549:
9.2.4.6, 11.2.4.6
369LabelThe label of the group should be unambiguous and understandable within the context.ShouldDIN EN ISO 9241-171: 8.1.2, 8.1.3
370LabelForm elements that belong together in terms of their content should be grouped and labeled.

Note: This applies to groups of [](radio buttons) and check boxes in particular.

ShouldDIN EN ISO 9241-125: 5.1.8

Programming/interfaces

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
370RoleThe “group” roles or, if applicable, a specific role for the respective group type, must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 9.1.3.1, 11.1.3.1, 11.5.2.5
371Web: StructureAll visually perceptible areas of the pages shall also be programmatically perceptible, e.g. through
  • headings,

  • regions,

  • other groupings.

MustEN 301 549: 9.1.3.1
372NameThe group must have a concise and expressive Accessible Name.MustEN 301 549: 9.2.4.6, 11.2.4.6, 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5
373Desktop: Element hierarchyThe parent / child relationships of the elements within the group must be communicated to the Accessibility API.MustEN 301 549: 11.5.2.9

Practical tip: form field groups in Web applications

Screen reader output

Please note:

HTML

Form field groups are marked with the <fieldset> element and serve the grouping of form fields that belong together, especially in the case of radio buttons. The form elements that belong to the group are nested in the source code within the <fieldsets>. The labeling of the form field group takes place with the <legend> element which should be the first child element in the <fieldset>. As the group label is output before the label of the form elements that it contains, it is necessary to take account of the following:

According to the HTML specification, the <legend> element can contain control elements. Sometimes, however, this is not supported by the assistive technology; it is therefore recommended that the label of the form field group is only included in the <legend> element in text form. The <fieldset> element can be marked as disabled with disabled. This means that all the contained form elements are disabled (with the exception of form elements located in the <legend> element).

Further information: 4.10.15 The fieldset element - HTML Standard (whatwg.org), [4].10.16 The legend element - HTML Standard (whatwg.org)](https://html.spec.whatwg.org/multipage/form-elements.html#the-legend-element)

ARIA

If the form field group is not implemented with the HTML element, it is also necessary to take account of the following:

Further information: group role - Accessible Rich Internet Applications (WAI-ARIA) 1.2 (w3.org) (External Link), radiogroup role - Accessible Rich Internet Applications (WAI-ARIA) 1.2 (w3.org) (External Link)

List

Online betrachten

See also: Selection list, tree structure, table

A list is used for the structured display of data. A list contains several list entries. Lists can be sorted or unsorted. Lists can be nested inside each other. Lists often have a visual indicator at the beginning of each list entry, which is also known as a bullet point, e.g.

List entries can contain control elements.

Figure 22: Unsorted and sorted list

Presentation

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
374ContrastThe text content of the list entries must have a contrast ratio of at least 4.5:1 with respect to the background.

Note: In the case of sorted lists, this also applies to bullet points insofar as they convey information (e.g. if they have a number or letter).

MustEN 301 549:
9.1.4.3, 11.1.4.11
375ContrastIf the list entries are only identifiable as such on the basis of their color design, the color must have a contrast ratio of at least 3:1 with respect to the neighboring colors.

Note 1: A list entry might be recognizable as such on the basis of its bullet point or background color, for example.

Note 2: The requirement does not apply if the list entries are clearly identifiable as such, because of the spacing between them, for example.

MustEN 301 549:
9.1.4.11, 11.1.4.11
376ContrastThe graphic content of the list entries must have a contrast ratio of at least 3:1 with respect to the background.

Note: In the case of sorted lists, this also applies to graphic bullet points insofar as they convey information.

MustEN 301 549:
9.1.4.11, 11.1.4.11
377ResizingTo make its contents perceptible without horizontal scrolling, no list entry may be wider than 320 px with 400% zoom.MustEN 301 549:
9.1.4.10, 11.1.4.10
378HierarchyIf the list contains nested lists, the hierarchy should be clearly visible.

Note: Nested lists are usually represented by indentation. Different bullet points can also be used depending on the hierarchy level.

ShouldDIN EN ISO 9241-125: 6.1.2
379Focus visibilityIf a list entry or an element in it receives the keyboard focus, the focus indicator must be visible (see Focus indicator).MustEN 301 549:
9.2.4.7, 11.2.4.7

Operation

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
380Use of the keyboardIt must be possible to access, operate and exit all control elements in the list with the keyboard (see Use of the keyboard table, below).MustEN 301 549: 9.2.1.1, 11.2.1.1, 9.2.1.2, 11.2.1.2
381Click areaThe click area of the control elements in the list should total at least 24 x 24 px (see Use of the pointing device).ShouldWCAG 2.2

Use of the keyboard: list (in an application that supports the virtual cursor)

With applications that support the virtual cursor, neither the list nor its list entries receive the keyboard focus. It should only be possible for interactive elements within the list entries to be accessed and operated with the keyboard.

ActionKeyClassification
Focusing interactive elements in the listTABRequired
Exiting interactive elements in the listTABRequired
Operating interactive elements in the listCorresponding to the respective elementRequired

Use of the keyboard: list (in an application that does not support the virtual cursor)

With applications that do not support the virtual cursor, each list entry must be able to receive the focus so that its contents are perceptible with assistive technology (e.g. screen reader).

ActionKeyClassification
Focusing of the list (first and/or last focused list entry)TABRequired
Exiting the listTABRequired
Cell-based navigation within the table in navigation modeUP/DOWN ARROWRequired
Quick navigation (to the first and/or last list entry)POS 1, ENDRecommended
Quick navigation (with a defined increment)PAGE UP/DOWN

Note: The increment should match the amount of visible entries in the list.

Recommended

Note: In the programming languages for software, there is often no element for lists. Instead of this, selection lists are used for non-nested lists, and tree structures are used for nested lists. In this case, the selection list and/or tree structure should include a note in its label or description that it is only for the presentation of content and not for the selection.

Use of the pointing device: list

ActionKeyClassification
Operation of interactive elementsCorresponding to the respective elementRequired

Programming/interfaces

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
382RoleThe (sorted and/or unsorted) list and list entry roles must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 9.1.3.1, 11.1.3.1, 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5
383RoleThe list and list entry roles can only be used for lists. Layout lists that are solely for the visual design and not for the display of structured data must not be assigned these roles.MustEN 301 549: 9.1.3.1, 11.1.3.1
384NameIf the list has a label or description, these must be communicated as the Accessible Name and/or Accessible Description (see label and description).MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5, 11.5.2.8
385OperationIt must be possible to access, operate and exit the list and/or the interactive elements that it contains with assistive technology (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.12, 11.5.2.17
386UpdateUpdates regarding the contents of lists must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.15
387Desktop: PositionThe size and position of the list entries and the interactive elements they contain must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Fokusindikator).MustEN 301 549: 11.5.2.5, 11.5.2.13
388Element hierarchyThe parent / child relationships of the elements within the list must be communicated to the Accessibility API.

Note 1: The assistive technology requires this information to determine, among others, the amount of list entries, their position within the list and the hierarchy of nested lists.

Note 2: A list cannot be programmatically divided into different lists, for instance.

MustEN 301 549: 9.1.3.1, 11.1.3.1, 11.5.2.9
389Bullet pointsThe bullet point must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 9.1.3.1, 11.1.3.1

Practical tip: lists in Web applications

Screen reader output of sorted and unsorted lists

With the virtual cursor:

Note: The Windows Narrator incorrectly outputs “heading level [number]“ for each list entry due to the implicit and/or explicit aria-level.

HTML

Unsorted lists are marked with <ul> and <li>. For control elements in a list, <menu> is also used instead of <ul>. The <menu> element is communicated to the Accessibility API with the semantics of the <ul> element.

Sorted lists are marked with <ol> and <li>. With sorted lists, it is possible to specify the start value with start, change the direction with reversed, and determine the type of bullet point with type.
Nested lists are implemented such that a list (<ol> or <ul>) is located within a <li> element of the parent list.

The difference between a sorted list and an unsorted list, i.e., between <ol> and <ul>, can only be identified visually and with the assistive technology on the basis of the bullet points. The bullet points should therefore match the list type.

Simple bullet points, such as disc for unsorted lists or decimal and/or lower-latin for sorted lists, should be chosen to ensure the correct output and to avoid lengthening it unnecessarily. The following sample values of the list-style-type CSS characteristic are output by the JAWS (first entry), NVDA (second entry, if different), and Windows Narrator (third entry, if different) screen readers as follows:

List characters with list-style-image are not output by JAWS and NVDA and are output as an “image” (without alternative text) by Windows Narrator.

Further information: 4.4.5 The ol element - HTML Standard (whatwg.org) (External Link), 4.4.6 The ul element - HTML Standard (whatwg.org) (External Link), 4.4.7 The menu element - HTML Standard (whatwg.org) (External Link), 4.4.8 The li element - HTML Standard (whatwg.org) (External Link)

ARIA

If the list is not implemented with the HTML element, it is also necessary to take account of the following:

Further information: list role - Accessible Rich Internet Applications (WAI-ARIA) 1.2 (w3.org) (External Link)

Table

Online betrachten

See also: List, Hierarchical table

A table is used for the structured display of data (see DIN EN ISO 9241-161: 8.44).

A table consists of cells which are arranged in columns and rows. In most cases, the first row contains the column headings and the first column frequently contains the row headings. Tables can also contain various functionalities, e.g.

The requirements for the individual control elements within the table are described for the respective control element. Only the additional requirements for the whole of the element are described here.

Figure 23: Table with column and row headings

Presentation

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
390ContrastThe text content of the table cells must have a contrast ratio of at least 4.5:1 with respect to the background.MustEN 301 549: 9.1.4.3, 11.1.4.3
391ContrastThe graphic content of the table cells must have a contrast ratio of at least 3:1 with respect to the background.MustEN 301 549: 9.1.4.11, 11.1.4.11
392ContrastGraphically communicated differences in status between the table cells shall have a contrast ratio of at least 3:1 compared with the background or the cells with a different status.

Note: This applies to the status “selected”, “sorted” or “editable”, etc.

ShouldEN 301 549: 9.1.4.1, 11.1.4.1, 9.1.4.11, 11.1.4.11
393ContrastIf the table cells are only identifiable as such on the basis of their color design, the color must have a contrast ratio of at least 3:1 with respect to the neighboring colors.

Note 1: A cell might be recognizable as such on the basis of its border or its background color, for example.

Note 2: The requirement does not apply if the cells are clearly identifiable as such, because of the spacing between them, for example.

ShouldEN 301 549: 9.1.4.11, 11.1.4.11
394LabelThe columns and rows must be labeled using column and row headings.

Note: The whole of the table can also be labeled.

MustEN 301 549: 11.5.2.6
395ValueTables should not have rows or columns that only have empty cells.ShouldEN 301 549: 11.5.2.7
396ResizingTo make its contents perceptible without horizontal scrolling, no table cell may be wider than 320 px with 400% zoom.MustEN 301 549: 9.1.4.10, 11.1.4.10
397Focus visibilityIf a table cell or an element in it receives the keyboard focus, the focus indicator must be visible (see Focus indicator).MustEN 301 549: 9.2.4.7, 11.2.4.7

Operation

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
398Use of the keyboardIt must be possible to access, operate and exit all control elements in the table with the keyboard (see Use of the keyboard table, below).

Note 1: This also applies to functions that can be initialized from the column headings, such as the sorting of the cell contents or the adjusting of the column width through the section separators between the column headings.

Note 2: Alternatively, the control elements outside the table can also be used to enable the table functionality.

Note 3: If keyboard shortcuts are used to enable the use of the keyboard, they must be described in the application and the Help option.

Note 4: The operation of the elements may not conflict with the navigation through the table. If the table can be navigated through with the use of the arrow keys, for example, the table may not contain any control elements that can be operated with the arrow keys unless it is possible to switch to the edit mode.

MustEN 301 549: 9.2.1.1, 11.2.1.1, 9.2.1.2, 11.2.1.2
399Click areaThe click area of the control elements in the table should total at least 24 x 24 px (see Use of the pointing device).ShouldWCAG 2.2

Use of the keyboard: table (in an application that supports the virtual cursor)

With applications that support the virtual cursor, neither the tables nor their cells receive the keyboard focus. It should only be possible for interactive elements within the table cells to be accessed and operated with the keyboard. This only applies if the table is not marked with role=grid. Tables with role=grid are operated like tables in applications without the virtual cursor (see following section).

ActionKeyClassification
Focusing interactive elements in the tableTABRequired
Exiting interactive elements in the tableTABRequired
Operating interactive elements in the tableCorresponding to the respective elementRequired

Use of the keyboard: table (in an application that does not support the virtual cursor)

With applications that do not support the virtual cursor and with tables that have been marked with role=grid, each table cell must be able to receive the focus so that its contents are perceptible with the assistive technology (e.g. screen reader). It is not sufficient if it is only possible to navigate through the table only one row at a time, for example. For tables in applications that do not support the virtual cursor, a distinction is made between the navigation and edit mode:

ActionKeyClassification
Focusing of the tableTABRequired
Exiting the tableTABRequired
Cell-based navigation within the table in navigation modeUP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT ARROWRequired
Horizontal quick navigation in navigation mode (navigation to the first and/or last cell in the current row)POS 1, ENDRequired with several columns
Vertical quick navigation in navigation mode (with a defined increment)PAGE UP/DOWN

Note: The increment should match the amount of visible rows.

Required with several rows
Quick navigation in navigation mode (navigation to the first and/or last cell in the current row)CTRL+POS 1, CTRL+ENDRequired with several rows and columns
Quick navigation in navigation mode (navigation to the first and/or last cell in the table)CTRL+POS 1, CTRL+ENDRecommended
Change to the edit modeF2, ENTER, [text input with input fields]Required if edit mode available
Change to the navigation modeF2, ENTER, ESC

Note: With ESC, the changes made in the table cell should be discarded.

Required if edit mode available
Navigation within the cell in edit modeTABRequired if edit mode available
Operation of interactive elements in edit modeCorresponding to the respective elementRequired if edit mode available
Operation of an interactive element in navigation mode (if the cell only contains this element and the element is not operated using the arrow keys)According to the respective element (e.g. ENTER for links and SPACE for buttons or check boxes)

Note: Elements that are operated with the arrow keys cannot be located in tables without edit mode because the arrow keys are used for navigating through the table.

Required if no edit mode available
Operation of an interactive element in navigation mode (if the cell only contains this element and the element is not operated using the arrow keys)According to the respective element (e.g. ENTER for links and SPACE for buttons or check boxes)Recommended if edit mode available
Selecting table cells, rows, columns
  • By check boxes and/or radio buttons or

  • SPACE

Note: The selection of neighboring and non-neighboring cells, rows or columns is carried out as described at the multiple selection list element.

Required if selection is possible

Table 1: Use of the pointing device: table

ActionKeyClassification
Operation of interactive elementsCorresponding to the respective elementRequired
Selecting table cells, rows, columns
  • With left click on the check boxes and/or radio buttons or

  • Left click on a cell that does not contain a control element

Note: The selection of neighboring and non-neighboring cells, rows or columns is carried out as described at the multiple selection list element.

Required if selection is possible

Programming/interfaces

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
400RoleThe table, table label, table row, column header, row header and table cell roles must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 9.1.3.1, 11.1.3.1, 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5
401RoleThe individual roles for tables can only be used for data tables. Layout tables that are solely for the visual design and not for the display of table data must not be assigned these roles.MustEN 301 549: 9.1.3.1, 11.1.3.1
402RoleContent which is associated with the table, but does not contain table data (such as the pagination) must not be located within the table.MustEN 301 549: 9.1.3.1, 11.1.3.1
403NameThe table must have a concise and expressive Accessible Name.MustEN 301 549: 9.2.4.6, 11.2.4.6, 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5
404NameIf the table has a description, it must be communicated as an Accessible Description.MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5
405StatusThe status of the table must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Element status).

Note: This applies, for example, to the “editable”, “sortable” or “selectable” status, provided that these functions are not perceptible using focusable control elements.

MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5
406StatusThe status of the table cells must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Element status).

Note: This applies, for example, to the status “selected”, “sorted” or “disabled”.

MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5
407ValueThe content of the table cells must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.7
408Column and row headingsIf the table has column and row headings, these must be communicated to the Accessibility API for each cell.MustEN 301 549: 9.1.3.1, 11.1.3.1, 11.5.2.6
409Desktop: Element hierarchyThe parent / child relationships of the elements within the table must be communicated to the Accessibility API.MustEN 301 549: 11.5.2.9
410OperationIt must be possible to access, operate and exit the table and/or the interactive elements that it contains with assistive technology (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.12, 11.5.2.17
411UpdateUpdates regarding the contents of tables and the status of the table cells must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.15
412Desktop: PositionThe size and position of the table cells and the interactive elements they contain must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Focus indicator).MustEN 301 549: 11.5.2.5

Practical tip: tables in desktop applications

Tables in list form

Some programming languages for desktop applications do not allow for the creation of tables which fulfill the navigation requirements within the table (with the use of the arrow keys). Instead of this, the table can only be navigated one row at a time. Therefore, for example, the table cannot be perceived in a structured way with a screen reader (because the entire row is output, in some cases without the corresponding column headings). In addition, in most cases, the control elements in the table cannot be operated with the keyboard.
In the following exceptional cases, the use of these tables is acceptable if the technology used does not offer an alternative:

If these requirements cannot be met, a different form of presentation must be chosen for the data.

Interactive elements in the table

Some programming languages for software do not allow for the creation of tables which fulfill the requirements referred to here regarding the operation of interactive elements within tables. In this case, interactive elements within the tables should be avoided. Instead of this, the tables should only be used to display data and the associated interactive elements should be located outside the table. Examples:

Alternatively, keyboard shortcuts or context menus can be used to enable the use of the keyboard. In this case, this alternative form of operation must be referred to in the application and the Help option.
With the control elements in the table that may be inaccessible, another option is to ensure the accessible operation with the use of control elements outside the table.

Hierarchical table

Online betrachten

Synonyms: Table with tree structure, tree grid, tree table

See also: Table, tree structure, accordion

A hierarchical table is designed to display hierarchical data in columns and rows in a structured way, in which subordinate data can be displayed and hidden row by row. An indicator on the rows shows whether the subordinate rows are shown or hidden.

In most cases, the first row contains the column headings and the first column frequently contains the row headings. Hierarchical tables can contain interactive elements, such as buttons for performing an action or check boxes for selecting a table row.

Figure 24: Hierarchical table

Presentation

The requirements regarding the table are described in the “table” section. Here, only the additional requirements are described which result from the ability to show and hide subordinate rows in the table.

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
454ContrastIcons that display the status of table rows (shown or hidden) must have a contrast ratio of at least 3:1 with respect to the background.MustEN 301 549:
9.1.4.11, 11.1.4.11

Operation

The requirements regarding the table are described in the “table” section. Here, only the additional requirements are described which result from the ability to show and hide subordinate rows in the table.

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
455Click areaThe click area of the elements for showing and hiding subordinate rows should total at least 24 x 24 px (see Use of the pointing device).ShouldWCAG 2.2

Use of the keyboard: hierarchical table

ActionKeyClassification
Show and hide subordinate rowsNot standardized, i.e. the operation should be described in the application and the Help optionRequired
Show and hide subordinate rowsDouble-click on parent rowsRecommended

Use of the pointing device: hierarchical table

ActionKeyClassification
Show and hide subordinate rowsLeft click on the show and hide iconRequired
Show and hide subordinate rowsnDouble-click on parent rowsRecommended

Programming/interfaces

The requirements regarding the table are described in the “table” section. Here, only the additional requirements are described which result from the ability to show and hide subordinate rows in the table.

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
413RoleThe hierarchical table role must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 9.1.3.1, 11.1.3.1, 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5
414StatusThe status of the table cells must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Element status).

Note: This also applies to the “open” or “closed” status (with respect to the subordinate rows).

MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5
415Desktop: Element hierarchyThe parent / child relationships of the elements within the hierarchical table must be communicated to the Accessibility API.MustEN 301 549: 11.5.2.9
416Desktop: Element hierarchyThe hierarchy level of the table rows must be communicated to the Accessibility API.MustEN 301 549: 11.5.2.9

Title bar

Online betrachten

Synonyms: Title

See also: Heading, status bar

The title bar is the top element of the application window and contains the title (see DIN EN ISO 9241-161: 8.47).

The text in the title bar is usually one-line. The title bar can contain an application icon. The title of the window is also displayed by the icons in the task bar or by pressing ALT+TAB when switching between the applications. The title bar often contains interactive elements (for closing, scaling, and minimizing the application) which are not in the tab loop.

Only those requirements that are directly related to the title bar are described below. Requirements of elements within the title bar are described at the respective element.

Note: Most of the requirements concerning the title bar refer to desktop applications only. For Web applications, the browser is the window with the title bar. The Web application itself does not contain a title bar. The labeling of the title bar of the browser is defined using the <title> element, however.

Figure 25: Title bar

Presentation

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
417LabelThe label of the title bar must be expressive.

Note: The title bar should contain the application name and, if applicable, the document title/file name or the purpose/function of the window.

MustEN 301 549: 9.2.4.2 11.2.4.6

Operation

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
418Desktop: Use of the keyboardThe control elements for closing, scaling and minimizing the application window must be operable with the keyboard (see Window).MustEN 301 549: 11.2.1.1
419Desktop: Use of the keyboardAll other control elements within the title bar must be operable with the keyboard. The operation of these elements is described at the respective element.MustEN 301 549: 11.2.1.1
420Click areaThe click area of the control elements in the title bar should total at least 24 x 24 px (see Use of the pointing device).ShouldWCAG 2.2

Programming/interfaces

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
421Desktop: OperationIt must be possible to operate the buttons in the title bar with assistive technology (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.12, 11.5.2.17

Status bar

Online betrachten

Synonyms: Footer, status information

See also: Title bar

A status bar is used for the display of status information (see DIN EN ISO 9241-161: 8.40). The status bar can also contain control elements. The status bar is usually located at the lower border of the window. The use of a status bar within the application window is optional.

Only those requirements that are directly related to the status bar are described below. Requirements of elements within the status bar are described at the respective element.

Figure 26: Status bar

Operation

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
422Use of the keyboardThe control elements of the status bar must be operable with the keyboard (see following table on use of the keyboard).MustEN 301 549: 11.2.1.1
423Click areaThe click area of the control elements in the status bar should total at least 24 x 24 px (see Use of the pointing device).ShouldWCAG 2.2

Use of the keyboard: status bar

ActionKeyClassification
Navigating to the status barRequired
Navigation from the status bar
  • Desktop: F6 or TAB

  • Web: TAB or documented keyboard shortcut

Required
Navigating within the status barTABRequired

Programming/interfaces

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
424RoleThe status bar role must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5
425UpdateImportant status messages must be marked so that they are output by the assistive technology without receiving the keyboard focus.

Note: Important status messages are error messages, for instance. A status message about the amount of characters entered is considered unimportant in a word processing system, especially as this changes constantly following the input.

MustEN 301 549: 11.4.1.3.1

Online betrachten

Synonyms: Dialog window, message, pop-up, dialog, dialog box

See also: Window, tooltip, error message

A modal dialog is used to display important information and control elements in a separate area. A modal dialog blocks the operation of the application window in the background (see DIN EN ISO 9241-161: 8.10).

A modal dialog always contains a text and one or more buttons that can be used to close the dialog. The modal dialog can also contain a title bar and status bar as well as other control elements, graphics, etc.

The requirements regarding the content of the modal dialog are described at the respective element. Only specific requirements for modal dialog are described here.

Examples:

Figure 27: Modal dialog
No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
426ResizingIt must be possible to scale the modal dialog by up to 200%. During the scaling, no loss of content or functionality may occur (see Resizing).

Note: Fixed headers and footers in the modal dialog should be avoided, as they cause the main vertical scrollable area to become too small.

MustEN 301 549: 9.1.4.4, 11.1.4.4.1
427ResizingThe modal dialog must be displayed in full without horizontal scrolling at a screen width of 320 px. If the modal dialog contains two-dimensional content such as tables, these should be horizontally scrollable (see Resizing).MustEN 301 549: 9.1.4.10, 11.1.4.10
428VisibilityThe dialog must stand out clearly from the background.

Note 1: This can take place, for example, with a border around the dialog or the use of a gray background.

Note 2: This also applies to the use of the Windows Contrast Adjustment.

MustEN 301 549: 11.1.4.11; 9.1.4.11
429Web: LabelIf the modal dialog is displayed in a separate browser window, it must have an expressive label.

Note: For the label, the <title> element is used.

MustEN 301 549: 9.2.4.2
430LabelThe modal dialog must have an expressive label.

Note: The label can be located in the title bar.

MustEN 301 549: 9.2.4.5, 11.2.4.6
No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
431Use of the keyboardIt must be possible to open, operate and close the modal dialog with the keyboard (see Use of the keyboard table, below).MustEN 301 549: 9.2.1.1, 11.2.1.1
432Use of the keyboardWhen the modal dialog is opened, the keyboard focus must be placed in the dialog.

Note: Typically, the keyboard focus should be placed at the beginning of the modal dialog. For simple modal dialogs, the focus can also be placed on a button at the end (e.g. “OK” or “Cancel”), provided that it is ensured that the title and text of the dialog are automatically output by the screen reader when the dialog is opened.

MustEN 301 549: 9.2.4.3, 11.2.4.3
433Use of the keyboardAs long as the modal dialog is open, the keyboard focus must remain within the dialog.MustEN 301 549: 9.2.4.3, 11.2.4.3
434Use of the keyboardWhen the modal dialog is closed, the keyboard focus must be reset to the triggering element or to an element with which the work can ultimately be continued.

Note: The resetting to the triggering element is not possible, for instance, if it has been removed due to the operation of the dialog. In this case, it is usually a good idea to place the keyboard focus on an element before or after the triggering element.

MustEN 301 549: 9.2.4.3, 11.2.4.3
ActionKeyClassification
Navigating within the modal dialogTABRequired
Closing the modal dialog
  • Desktop: ESC, ALT+F4

  • Web: ESC

Required
ActionKeyClassification
Closing the modal dialogLeft click on the corresponding buttonRequired
No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
435RoleThe modal dialog role must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5
436NameIf the modal dialog has a label or description, these must be communicated as the Accessible Name and/or Accessible Description (see Label and Description).

Note 1: The title bar or main heading of the dialog should be used as the Accessible Name.

Note 2: If the modal dialog contains only a small amount of text, this can be communicated as the Accessible Description.

MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5, 11.5.2.8
437Desktop: Element hierarchyThe parent / child relationships of the elements within the dialog must be communicated to the Accessibility API.MustEN 301 549: 11.5.2.9
438PositionThe size and position of the modal dialog must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see focus visibility).MustEN 301 549: 11.5.2.5

Control elements

Online betrachten

Table of contents

Section separator

Online betrachten

Synonyms: Separator, window splitter, splitter

See also: Control point, slider, scrollbar

A section separator is used to scale a page area or two neighboring page areas. Section separators are also used to scale table columns and rows.

A section separator is located between two page areas and consists of a bar and in some cases a control point. Section separators can have different manifestations:

Figure 28: Section separator

Presentation

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
438ContrastThe bar or control point of the section separator must have a contrast ratio of at least 3:1 with respect to the background.MustEN 301 549: 9.1.4.11, 11.1.4.11
439Focus visibilityIf the section separator receives the keyboard focus, the focus indicator must be visible (see Focus indicator).MustEN 301 549: 9.2.4.7, 11.2.4.7

Operation

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
440Use of the keyboardIt must be possible to access, operate and exit the section separator with the keyboard (see Use of the keyboard table, below).

Alternatively, it must be possible to scale the area with the keyboard when the focus is in the scalable area. In this case, the use of the keyboard for the section separator must be explained in the application and/or Help option. In addition, it must then be ensured that an area which is hidden by operation of the section separator can also be displayed again.

Exception: If the section separator has no relevant function, it does not have to be keyboard-operable. This is the case, for example, if the section separator is used to scale page areas, if all content is fully perceptible in the standard display, and if the scaling does not add any value.
MustEN 301 549: 9.2.1.1, 11.2.1.1, 9.2.1.2, 11.2.1.2
441Use of the pointing deviceThe use of the pointing device for the section separator may not be complex.

Please note: Complex use of the pointing device means

  • multipoint operation (e.g. swiping with several fingers),

  • path-based operation (where the start and end points of the use of the pointing device are not just relevant, but at least one intermediate point is).

MustEN 301 549: 9.2.5.1, 11.2.5.1
442Use of the pointing deviceIt should also be possible to operate the section separator without the dragging use of the pointing device.

Note: This can be achieved, for example, by clicking on the section separator and then clicking on the target position.

ShouldWCAG 2.2
443UpdatesWhen focusing and operating the section separator, no unexpected change of context may occur.MustEN 301 549: 9.3.2.1, 11.3.2.1, 9.3.2.2, 11.3.2.2
444Click areaThe click area of the section separator should be at least 24 x 24 px (see Use of the pointing device).ShouldWCAG 2.2: 2.5.8 (AA)

Use of the keyboard: section separator

Note: The following requirements only apply if the section separator receives the focus with the keyboard.

ActionKeyClassification
Focusing of the section separatorTABRequired
Exiting the section separatorTABRequired
Operation of the section separatorUP/DOWN ARROW, LEFT/RIGHT ARROW (depending on the orientation of the section separator)Required
Operation of the section separator (minimum and maximum scaling)POS1, ENDRecommended
Switch between current, minimum and maximum scalingENTER
SPACE
Recommended

Use of the pointing device: section separator

ActionKeyClassification
Operation of the section separatorLeft click and drag on the bar or control point (drag and drop)Required
Operation of the section separatorLeft click to enable and move the pointing device, left click on the target positionRecommended

Programming/interfaces

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
445RoleThe role of the section separator must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5
446ValueThe value of the section separator must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Accessibility API).

Hinweis: Note: The value of the section separator is frequently given in the range 0% to 100%.

MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.7
447Desktop: Value rangeThe minimum and maximum value of the section separator must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 11.5.2.7
448StatusThe status of the section separator must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Element status).MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5
449OrientationThe orientation of the section separator (vertical or horizontal) must be communicated to the Accessibility API.MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2
450NameThe section separator must have a concise and expressive Accessible Name.

Note: A section separator typically has no visible label. The name of the section separator can contain the Accessible Name of the scalable areas.

MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.12, 11.5.2.17
451OperationIf the section separator receives the keyboard focus, it must be possible to access, operate and exit it with assistive technology. Otherwise, the alternative form of operation must be operable with assistive technology (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.12, 11.5.2.17
452UpdateUpdates concerning the Accessible Name, value or status of the section separator must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.15
453Desktop: PositionThe size and position of the control point (if available) and/or the section separator (if without control point) must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Focus indicator).MustEN 301 549: 11.5.2.5

Online betrachten

Synonyms: Cross-reference, reference, hypertext link, hyper link

See also: Button, Menu, Image Map

Links allow navigation to a defined location (see DIN EN ISO 9241-161: 8.23).

A link has a text or graphic label (e.g. an icon). Links usually have a visual indicator to identify the link as such, this applies to text links in particular. An underline and a different color are typically used as visual indicators for text links.

Figure 29: Text in normal font and black, link in bold, underlined and colored
No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
454ContrastIf the link has a text label, it must have a contrast ratio of at least 4.5:1 with respect to the background.MustEN 301 549: 9.1.4.3, 11.1.4.3
455ContrastIf the link has a graphic label, it must have a contrast ratio of at least 3:1 with respect to the background.MustEN 301 549: 9.1.4.11, 11.1.4.11
456ContrastIf the link is only identifiable as a link on the basis of its text color, the contrast ratio between the color of neighboring text contents and the text color of the link must be at least 3:1.MustEN 301 549: 9.1.4.1, 11.1.4.1
457ContrastIf the link is only identifiable as a link due to a graphic element (e.g. underline or icon), the contrast ratio between the graphic element and the background color must be at least 3:1.MustEN 301 549: 9.1.4.11, 11.1.4.11
458ContrastIf the status of the link is communicated in graphical form, the contrast ratio between the graphic element and the background color must be at least 3:1.

Note: The status also refers to the following information:

  • linked document format (e.g. PDF),

  • link destination (e.g. internal or external links),

  • link type (e.g. link to a phone number or email address),

  • position in the application (for example, link to the current page).

MustEN 301 549: 9.1.4.11, 11.1.4.11
459LabelThe visible label of the link must correspond to or be contained in the link name which is communicated to the Accessibility API (see Label).MustEN 301 549 9.2.5.3, 11.2.5.3
460LabelThe purpose of the link must be determinable from the link label or the programmatically linked link context.

Note 1: In the case of desktop applications, e.g. a tooltip, a label of a group or a description can be considered the link context as long as they are programmatically linked with the link.

Note 2: In the case of Web applications, text in the same paragraph or sentence, in the same list entry or a parent list entry, in the section header, in the same table cell, or in an associated column or row heading is considered to be a programmatically determinable link context.

MustEN 301 549: 11.2.4.4
461LabelIt should be possible to determine the purpose of the link from the link label.

Note: This is important because the programmatically determinable link context often cannot be determined, or can be determined only with difficulty, using the screen reader. This applies to the link overview in particular which the screen reader is able to display.

ShouldWCAG 2.1: 2.4.9 (AAA)
462LabelIf the link has a graphic label, the link should have a tooltip with a text label.ShouldWCAG 2.1: 3.3.5 (AAA); DIN EN ISO 9241-143: 9.6.11
463LabelIf the link refers to a destination in another program or document format, reference should be made to it on the link.ShouldWCAG 2.1: 3.2.5 (AAA)
464Web: ConsistencyIf a list of links is used for navigation, the links on each screen should be displayed in the same relative order and receive the keyboard focus (see Consistency).MustEN 301 549: 9.3.2.3
465Desktop: ConsistencyIf a list of links is used for navigation, the links on each screen should be displayed in the same relative order and receive the keyboard focus (see Consistency).ShouldWCAG 2.1: 3.2.3 (AA)
466PositionIf a list of links is used for navigation, then the link to the current page or to the area in which the current page is located should be marked.ShouldWCAG 2.1: 2.4.8 (AAA)
467Focus visibilityIf the link receives the keyboard focus, the focus indicator must be visible (see Focus indicator).MustEN 301 549: 9.2.4.7, 11.2.4.7
No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
468Use of the keyboardIt must be possible to access, operate and exit the link with the keyboard (see Use of the keyboard table, below).MustEN 301 549: 9.2.1.1, 11.2.1.1, 9.2.1.2, 11.2.1.2
469Use of the keyboardWhen enabling links within pages, the linked element must be focused. It is not sufficient if the linked element is only scrolled into the visible area.MustEN 301 549: 9.2.1.1, 11.2.1.1, 9.2.4.3, 11.2.4.3
470Web: Use of the keyboardIt must be possible to skip areas of content with links that occur on several pages using the keyboard (see Practical tip: efficient keyboard navigation).

Note: This applies to the navigation links at the top of the page in particular.

MustEN 301 549: 9.2.4.1
471Use of the keyboardIf a window contains areas with several links, a mechanism should be implemented for skipping these page areas with the keyboard (see Practical tip: efficient navigation).ShouldDIN EN ISO 9241-171: 9.3.16, 9.3.17
472Use of the keyboardConsecutive links with the same link destination should be avoided.

Note: This applies, among others, to tiles, in which both the heading and a text at the end (e.g. “read more”) are frequently linked, as well as to links that have a text and graphic label.

ShouldWCAG 2.1: 2.4.9 (AAA)
473UpdatesWhen a link is focused, no change of context may occur.MustEN 301 549: 9.3.2.1, 11.3.2.1
474Click areaIf the link is not located within continuous text, the click area of the link should be at least 24 x 24 px (see Use of the pointing device).ShouldWCAG 2.2: 2.5.8 (AA)
ActionKeyClassification
Focusing of the linkTABRequired
Exiting the linkTABRequired
Enabling the linkENTERRequired
ActionKeyClassification
Enabling the linkLeft clickRequired
No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
475RoleThe role of the link must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5
476StatusThe status of the link must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Element status).

Note: This also applies to information

  • about the linked document format (e.g. PDF),

  • about the link destination (e.g. internal or external links),

  • about the link type (e.g. link to a phone number or email address),

  • about the position in the application (for example, link to the current page),

provided that this information is communicated in visual form.

MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5
477NameThe link must have a concise and expressive Accessible Name.

Note: If the Accessible Name is not expressive, the programmatically perceptible link context can also be used to communicate the purpose of the link.

MustEN 301 549: 9.2.4.4, 11.2.4.4, 9.2.4.6, 11.2.4.6, 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5
478NameIf the link has a description, it must be communicated as an Accessible Description.MustEN 301 549: 9.2.4.4, 11.2.4.4, 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5
479OperationIt must be possible to access, operate and exit the link with assistive technology (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.12, 11.5.2.17
480UpdateUpdates concerning the Accessible Name or status of the link must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.15
481Desktop: PositionThe size and position of the link must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Focus indicator).MustEN 301 549: 11.5.2.5, 11.5.2.13

Note:

The link should be implemented with the HTML element <a href=URL>. The href attribute is required.

Label:

Status and type:

Further information: 4.6 Links - HTML Standard (whatwg.org) (External Link)

If the link is not implemented with the HTML element, in addition to the notes on HTML links, it is necessary to take account of the following:

Further information: link role - Accessible Rich Internet Applications (WAI-ARIA) 1.2 (w3.org), Link Pattern | APG | WAI | W3C

Button

Online betrachten

Synonyms: Command button, push button

See also: Menu button, link, toggle switch, switch, tab, accordion

Buttons are used to execute a command (see DIN EN ISO 9241-161: 8.32).

A button consists of a text or graphic label and a visual indicator in order to identify the button as such. A border is usually used as a visual indicator for buttons.

Buttons can be used within other elements, e.g. in tables, tree structures, toolbars, scrollbars, tab panels containing tabs, accordions, input fields, spin buttons, drop-down lists and combined input fields. Deviating requirements concerning the buttons are described in the sections about these elements

Figure 30: Confirm button

Presentation

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
482ContrastIf the button has a text label, this must have a contrast ratio of at least 4.5:1 with respect to the background.MustEN 301 549: 9.1.4.3, 11.1.4.3
483ContrastIf the button has a graphic label, this must have a contrast ratio of at least 3:1 with respect to the background.MustEN 301 549: 9.1.4.11, 11.1.4.11
484ContrastIf the button is only identifiable as such on the basis of its color design, the color must have a contrast ratio of at least 3:1 with respect to the neighboring colors.

Note 1: A button might be recognizable as an interactive element on the basis of its border or its background color, for example.

Note 2: The requirement does not apply if the button is clearly identifiable as a button, because of its position or labeling, for example.

MustEN 301 549: 9.1.4.11, 11.1.4.11
485LabelThe visible label of the button must correspond to or be contained in the name of the button which is communicated to the Accessibility API (see Label).MustEN 301 549 9.2.5.3, 11.2.5.3
486LabelIf the button has a graphic label, the button should have a tooltip with a text label.ShouldWCAG 2.1: 3.3.5 (AAA); DIN EN ISO 9241-143: 9.6.11
487Focus visibilityIf the button receives the keyboard focus, the focus indicator must be visible (see Focus indicator).MustEN 301 549: 9.2.4.7, 11.2.4.7

Operation

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
488Use of the keyboardIt must be possible to access, operate and exit the button with the keyboard (see Use of the keyboard table).MustEN 301 549: 9.2.1.1, 11.2.1.1, 9.2.1.2, 11.2.1.2
489Use of the keyboardFrequently used buttons should have a keyboard shortcut which is documented in the application and the Help option.ShouldDIN EN ISO 9241-171: 9.3.10
490Web: Use of the keyboardIt must be possible to skip areas of content with buttons that occur on several pages using the keyboard (see Practical tip: efficient navigation).MustEN 301 549: 9.2.4.1
491Use of the keyboardIf a window contains areas with several buttons, a mechanism should be implemented for skipping these page areas with the keyboard (see Practical tip: efficient navigation).ShouldDIN EN ISO 9241-171: 9.3.16, 9.3.17
492Use of the pointing deviceIt must be possible to undo or cancel the accidental enabling of the button. To do this, the button may only be enabled when it is released, i.e. only upon the up event and not upon the down event (see Use of the pointing device).MustEN 301 549: 9.2.5.2, 11.2.5.2
493UpdatesWhen the button is focused, no change of context may occur.MustEN 301 549: 9.3.2.1, 11.3.2.1
494UpdatesIf the enabling of the button causes a new window or a modal pop-up to open, the focus must be placed in the window and/or the pop-up (see Navigation sequence).MustEN 301 549: 9.2.4.3, 11.2.4.3
495UpdatesIf an unannounced change of context is performed through the enabling of the button within the current program interface, this must take place according to the current position of the keyboard focus, or the focus must be placed at the beginning of the updated area.MustEN 301 549: 11.2.4.3
496UpdatesIf an update is performed through the enabling of the button within the current program interface that requires an interaction on the part of the user, this should take place according to the current position of the keyboard focus. The keyboard focus should remain on the button or be placed at the beginning of the updated area (see Change of context).

Note: User interaction can mean reading a piece of information or the operation of interactive elements.

ShouldWCAG 2.1: 3.2.5 (AAA)
497UpdatesIf the button is removed from the program interface as a result of its enabling, the focus should be placed on a neighboring control element or on a control element with which the work can be continued in a coherent way.

Note: This applies, for example, to Delete buttons which refer to a single element.

ShouldWCAG 2.1: 3.2.5 (AAA)
498Click areaThe click area of the button should be at least 24 x 24 px (see Use of the pointing device).ShouldWCAG 2.2

Use of the keyboard: button

ActionKeyClassification
Focusing of the buttonTABRequired
Exiting the buttonTABRequired
Enabling the buttonSPACE, ENTERRequired

Use of the pointing device: button

ActionKeyClassification
Enabling the buttonLeft clickRequired

Programming/interfaces

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
499RoleThe button role must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 1.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5
500StatusThe status of the button must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Element status).MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5
501NameThe button must have a concise and expressive Accessible Name.MustEN 301 549: 9.2.4.6, 11.2.4.6, 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.
502NameIf the button has a description, it must be communicated as an Accessible Description.MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5
503NameIf the purpose of the button is determined by the visual context, this context must be communicated as part of the Accessible Name or Accessible Description.

Note: The Accessible Name of a button cannot, therefore, be simply “Close” or “Delete” if only the visual context indicates which element is closed or deleted. Instead, the Accessible Name must be “Close pop-up” or “Delete file [file name]”, for instance. Alternatively, the Accessible Description must contain a reference to the element which is to be closed or deleted.

MustEN 301 549: 9.1.3.1, 11.1.3.1, 9.2.4.6, 11.2.4.6, 9.3.3.2, 11.3.3.2
504Keyboard shortcutIf the button has a visually perceptible keyboard shortcut, it must be communicated to the Accessibility API.MustEN 301 549: 9.1.3.1, 11.1.3.1
505OperationIt must be possible to access, operate and exit the button with assistive technology (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.12, 11.5.2.17
506UpdateUpdates concerning the Accessible Name or status of the button must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.15
507Desktop: PositionThe size and position of the button must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Focus indicator).MustEN 301 549: EN 301 549: 11.5.2.5, 11.5.2.13

Practical tip: buttons in Web applications

Screen reader output

Please note:

HTML

The button should be implemented with the HTML elements <button> or <input type=button>. For graphic buttons, <input type=image> can be used. In forms, <input type=submit> and/or <input type=reset> can be used for the buttons for sending and resetting the inputs.

Label:

Status and type:

Further information: 4.10.6 The button element - HTML Standard (whatwg.org), 4.10.5.1.21 Button state (type=button) - HTML Standard (whatwg.org), 4.10.5.1.19 Image Button state (type=image) - HTML Standard (whatwg.org), 4.10.5.1.18 Submit Button state (type=submit) - HTML Standard (whatwg.org), 4.10.5.1.20 Reset Button state (type=reset) - HTML Standard (whatwg.org)

ARIA

If the button is not implemented with the HTML element, in addition to the notes on HTML buttons, it is necessary to take account of the following:

Further information: button role - Accessible Rich Internet Applications (WAI-ARIA) 1.2 (w3.org), Button Pattern | APG | WAI | W3C

Switch

Online betrachten

Synonyms: Switch button, toggle switch

See also: Button, check box, menu switch, toggle switch

A switch is used to select the values “On” or “Off”. The switch can also be used for other value pairs, provided that these values are communicated in text form.

A switch has a border that contains a visual indicator which displays the selected value on the basis of its position. The indicator is usually a circle which is positioned on the left (“Off” value) or right (“On” value) in the border.

Figure 31: Switch in the On and Off state

Presentation

The requirements concerning buttons are described in the “buttons” section. Here, only the additional requirements are described which result from the fact that it is a button that is able to have two states.

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
508ContrastThe visual indicator for the value must have a contrast ratio of at least 3:1 with respect to the background.MustEN 301 549: 9.1.4.11, 11.1.4.11
509ContrastIf the value of the switch is also communicated in text form, it must have a contrast ratio of at least 4.5:1 with respect to the background.MustEN 301 549: 9.1.4.3, 11.1.4.3
510ValueThe value of the switch should also be communicated in text form.

Note: Although “On” is associated with the right position and “Off” is associated with the left position, it cannot be assumed that all users are familiar with this. In addition, the value is often color coded (“On” in green or a dark color, “Off” in red or a light color). The colors may not be perceivable by people who are disabled, however.

ShouldDIN EN ISO 9241-143: 9.6.11

Operation

The requirements concerning buttons are described in the “buttons” section. Here, only the additional requirements are described which result from the fact that it is a button that is able to have two states.

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
511UpdatesWhen focusing and operating the switch, no unexpected change of context may occur.MustEN 301 549: 9.3.2.2, 11.3.2.2

Use of the keyboard: switch
ActionKeyClassification
Operating the switchSPACERequired
Operating the switchENTERRecommended
Use of the pointing device: switch
ActionKeyClassification
Operating the switchLeft clickRequired

Programming/interfaces

The requirements concerning buttons are described in the “buttons” section. Here, only the additional requirements are described which result from the fact that it is a button that is able to have two states.

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
512RoleThe switch role must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5
513ValueThe value of the switch must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.7
514ValueIf the values of the switch do not represent “On” and “Off”, but are used for other states which are visible in text form on the switch, these values must be communicated to the Accessibility API.MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.7

Practical tip: switches in Web applications

Screen reader output

Note:

HTML

There is no element for switches in HTML. Toggle switches or check boxes can be used instead.

ARIA

In this respect, with switches, the following should be taken into account:

Further information: switch role - Accessible Rich Internet Applications (WAI-ARIA) 1.2 (w3.org) (External Link), Switch Pattern | APG | WAI | W3C

Toggle switch

Online betrachten

Synonyms: Toggle button

See also: Button, check box, menu button, switch

Toggle switches are used to select the “pressed” or “not pressed” states (see DIN EN ISO 9241-161: 8.48).

A toggle switch consists of a text or graphic label and a visual indicator in order to identify the toggle switch as such. A border is usually used as a visual indicator for toggle switches. The toggle switch also has a visual indicator of the state, such as a different background color.

Figure 32: Toggle switch in the pressed and not pressed status

Presentation

The requirements concerning buttons are described in the “buttons” section. Here, only the additional requirements are described which result from the fact that it is a button that is able to have two states.

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
515ContrastIf the state of the toggle switch (pressed, not pressed) is only communicated with a different color, the contrast ratio of the colors must be at least 3:1.

Note: To ensure that the status of the toggle switch is visible when using Windows Contrast Adjustment, it should not only be communicated in color. An icon or border effect can be used to communicate the status instead.

MustEN 301 549: 9.1.4.1, 11.1.4.1

Operation

The requirements concerning buttons are described in the “buttons” section. Here, only the additional requirements are described which result from the fact that it is a button that is able to have two states.

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
516UpdatesWhen focusing and operating the toggle switch, no unexpected change of context may occur.MustEN 301 549: 9.3.2.2, 11.3.2.2

Use of the keyboard: toggle switch

ActionKeyClassification
Operation of the toggle switch (status change between “pressed” and “not pressed”)SPACERequired
Operation of the toggle switch (status change between “pressed” and “not pressed”)ENTERRecommended

Use of the pointing device: toggle switch

ActionKeyClassification
Operation of the toggle switch (status change between “pressed” and “not pressed”)Left clickRequired

Programming/interfaces

The requirements concerning buttons are described in the “buttons” section. Here, only the additional requirements are described which result from the fact that it is a button that is able to have two states.

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
517RoleThe toggle switch role must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5
518StatusThe status of the toggle switch must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Element status).

Note: This also applies to the “pressed” or “not pressed” status.

MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5

Practical tip: toggle switch in Web applications

Screen reader output for toggle switch with aria-pressed

Screen reader output for toggle switch with aria-expanded

HTML

There is no element for toggle switches in HTML. Instead of this, buttonsthat have alternative labeling (e.g. “Select” and/or “Cancel selection”), check boxes or the ARIA toggle switch can be used. Toggle switches which have the purpose of showing and hiding areas should be marked with <details> and <summary> ( 4.11.1 The details element - HTML Standard (whatwg.org) (External Link), 4.11.2 The summary element - HTML Standard (whatwg.org) (External Link)). According to the HTML specification, the <summary> element may contain links, headings, input fields and many other elements – it is important to remember, however, that all the elements which are located within <summary> are imperceptible and cannot be operated with the screen reader, as the <summary> element is communicated to the Accessibility API as a button. Therefore, the <summary> element should only contain a concise and expressive label in text form.

ARIA

With toggle switches, the following should be taken into account:

Further information: aria-pressed state - Accessible Rich Internet Applications (WAI-ARIA) 1.2 (w3.org) (External Link), aria-expanded state - Accessible Rich Internet Applications (WAI-ARIA) 1.2 (w3.org) (External Link), Button Examples | APG | WAI | W3C, Disclosure (Show/Hide) Pattern | APG | WAI | W3C

Split button

Online betrachten

Synonyms: Bifurcated switch

See also: Drop-down list, menu button, context menu, button

Split buttons are for the execution of a command that can be configured using a menu, a selection list or a dialog window.

Alternatively, split buttons are used for grouping related functions, where the primary function can be initialized directly using the button and the secondary functions can be initialized using the menu at the button.

A split button consists of a text or graphic label and a visual indicator in order to identify the button as such (usually a border). The split button also has additional buttons (with arrow icon), with which the secondary functions can be shown and hidden.

Figure 33: Split button for the selection of a color

Presentation

The requirements concerning buttons are described in the “buttons” section. Here, only the additional requirements are described which result from the fact that it is a button with primary and secondary functions. The requirements regarding the elements that can be shown are described at the respective element.

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
519ContrastThe arrow icon for opening and closing the menu or similar must have a contrast ratio of at least 3:1 with respect to the neighboring color.MustEN 301 549: 9.1.4.11, 11.1.4.11
520ContrastIf the selected entry only differs from the unselected entry in the open state due to its color (e.g. foreground or background color), the colors must have a contrast ratio of at least 3:1.

Note: The selected entry does not have to be color coded or marked with color only. It can be marked with a check box, for example. In this case, the contrast requirements for the color coding are eliminated as long as the check box has sufficient contrasts.

MustEN 301 549: 9.1.4.11, 11.1.4.11

Operation

The requirements concerning buttons are described in the “buttons” section. Here, only the additional requirements are described which result from the fact that it is a button with primary and secondary functions. The requirements regarding the elements that can be shown are described at the respective element.

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
521Use of the keyboardIt must be possible to access, operate and exit the split button with the keyboard (see Use of the keyboard table, below).

Note: The button for showing and hiding the secondary functions should not receive the keyboard focus separately.

MustEN 301 549: 9.2.1.1, 11.2.1.1, 9.2.1.2, 11.2.1.2
522UpdatesIf the function of the split button can be configured, no unexpected change of context may occur during or after the configuration.MustEN 301 549: 9.3.2.2, 11.3.2.2

Use of the keyboard: split button

ActionKeyClassification
Enabling the split button
  • SPACE

  • ENTER

Required
Opening the menu or similarALT+DOWN ARROWRequired
Closing the menu or similar
  • ESC

  • ALT+ UP ARROW

  • [Selection of a menu item or similar]

Required

Use of the pointing device: split button

ActionKeyClassification
Enabling the split buttonLeft click on the button labelRequired
Opening the menu or similarLeft click on the arrow iconRequired
Closing the menu or similar
  • Left click on the arrow icon

  • Left click on an entry in the menu or similar

  • Left click outside the split button

Required

Programming/interfaces

The requirements concerning buttons are described in the “buttons” section. Here, only the additional requirements are described which result from the fact that it is a button with primary and secondary functions. The requirements regarding the elements that can be shown are described at the respective element.

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
522RoleThe split button role must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5
523ValueIf the current configuration of the split button is visible in the closed state, it must be communicated as a value to the Accessibility API.

Note: If this is not possible, the value must be communicated as part of the label or description.

MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5

Practical tip: split buttons in Web applications

HTML

There is no element for split buttons in HTML. Instead, two buttons with expressive labeling (e.g. “Assign text color” and/or “Select text color”) can be used which receive the focus with TAB.

ARIA

There is no role for split buttons in ARIA. Instead, two separate buttons can be used as described above.

Context menu

Online betrachten

Synonyms: Pop-up menu, pie menu

See also: Menu button, menu

Context menus are used for displaying a context-specific menu with function for the element currently focused with the keyboard or moved over with the pointing device (see DIN EN ISO 9241-161: 8.29).

A context menu has one or more menu items which are mostly vertical. A menu item can have a sub-menu. The menu items of a sub-menu are also arranged vertically. Sub-menus can also be nested several times, i.e. a menu item in a sub-menu can also have a sub-menu.

Figure 34: Context menu for the text editing

Presentation

The requirements concerning the menu are described in the “menu” section. Here, only the additional requirements are described which result from the fact that it is a context menu.

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
524ContrastIf the control element with context menu has a visual reference to the context menu, this must have a contrast ratio of at least 4.5:1 (text) and/or 3:1 (graphic) with respect to the background.MustEN 301 549: 9.1.4.3, 11.1.4.3, 9.1.4.11, 11.1.4.11

Operation

The requirements concerning the menu are described in the “menu” section. Here, only the additional requirements are described which result from the fact that it is a context menu.

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
525Use of the keyboardThe control element with context menu must be accessible with the keyboard, and it must be possible to open the context menu with the keyboard (see Use of the keyboard table, below).MustEN 301 549: 9.2.1.1, 11.2.1.1, 9.2.1.2, 11.2.1.2

Use of the keyboard: context menu

ActionKeyClassification
Opening the context menuCONTEXT MENU, SHIFT+F10Required
Closing the context menuESC, SHIFT+F10, [to select a menu item]Required

Use of the pointing device: context menu

ActionKeyClassification
Opening the context menuRight clickRequired
Closing the context menuLeft click on a menu item, click outside the context menuRequired

Programming/interfaces

The requirements concerning the menu are described in the “menu” section. Here, only the additional requirements are described which result from the fact that it is a context menu.

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
526RoleThe context menu role must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5
527StatusIf the control element with context menu has a visual reference to the context menu, this reference must communicated to the Accessibility API.MustEN 301 549: 9.1.3.1, 11.1.3.1
528OperationThe control element with context menu must be accessible with assistive technology, and it must be possible to open the context menu with assistive technology (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.12, 11.5.2.17

Online betrachten

Synonyms: Menu bar

See also: Context menu, menu button, toolbar, tree structure, tab group

Menus are used for selecting functions or for navigation (see DIN EN ISO 9241-161: 8.26).

A menu has several menu items which are usually arranged horizontally and adjacent to each other. A menu item can have a sub-menu. The menu items of a sub-menu are arranged vertically. Sub-menus can be nested several times, i.e. a menu item in a sub-menu can also have a sub-menu. It is only possible to display one sub-menu per hierarchy level. A menu can contain menu items that can be selected like check boxes or radio buttons. The menu items can be grouped. The label of the groups cannot be selected.

Figure 35: Application menu
No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
529ContrastIf the menu item has a text label, this must have a contrast ratio of at least 4.5:1 with respect to the background.MustEN 301 549: 9.1.4.3, 11.1.4.3
530ContrastIf the menu item has a graphic label, this must have a contrast ratio of at least 3:1 with respect to the background.MustEN 301 549: 9.1.4.11, 11.1.4.11
531ContrastThe arrow icon which refers to a sub-menu must have a contrast ratio of at least 3:1 with respect to the neighboring color.MustEN 301 549: 9.1.4.11, 11.1.4.11
532ContrastIf the selected menu item only differs from the unselected menu item due to its color (e.g. foreground or background color), the colors must have a contrast ratio of at least 3:1.

Note: The selected menu item does not have to be color coded or marked with color only. It can be marked with a check box or a radio button, for example. In this case, the contrast requirements for the color coding are eliminated as long as the check box or the radio button has sufficient contrasts.

MustEN 301 549: 9.1.4.11, 11.1.4.11
533LabelIf the menu item has a graphic label, it should have a tooltip with a text label.ShouldWCAG 2.1: 3.3.5 (AAA);DIN EN ISO 9241-143: 9.6.11
534Web: ConsistencyIf the menu is used for navigation, the menu items on each screen should be displayed in the same relative order and receive the keyboard focus (see Consistency).MustEN 301 549: 9.3.2.3
535Desktop: ConsistencyIf the menu is used for navigation, the menu items on each screen should be displayed in the same relative order and receive the keyboard focus (see Consistency).ShouldWCAG 2.1: 3.2.3 (AA)
536Focus visibilityIf a menu item receives the keyboard focus, the focus indicator must be visible (see Focus indicator).MustEN 301 549: 9.2.4.7, 11.2.4.7
537ResizingThe menu must be perceptible and operable with a font size adjustment of up to 400% (and a resulting display width of 320 px) (see Zoom).

Note: The menu items can, for example,

  • wrap (i.e. they are shown in several successive rows),

  • be initialized with a menu button (e.g. with a hamburger icon (icon with three horizontal bars)),

  • be designed so they are scrollable horizontally (e.g. by scrollbar or two buttons).

MustEN 301 549: 9.1.4.10, 11.1.4.10
No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
538Use of the keyboardIt must be possible to access, operate and exit the menu with the keyboard (see Use of the keyboard table).MustEN 301 549: 9.2.1.1, 11.2.1.1, 9.2.1.2, 11.2.1.2
539Use of the keyboardFrequently used functions should have a keyboard shortcut.

Note 1: The keyboard shortcut should be displayed at the corresponding menu item.

Note 2: The keyboard shortcuts should be documented in the Help option.

ShouldDIN EN ISO 9241-171: 9.3.10; DIN EN ISO 9241-171: 9.3.11
540Use of the keyboardAll the menu items should have a shortcut key.

Note: The shortcut key should be marked by underlining the corresponding letter in the label.

ShouldDIN EN ISO 9241-171: 9.3.10; DIN EN ISO 9241-171: 9.3.11
541UpdatesWhen focusing and operating the menu, no unexpected change of context may occur.MustEN 301 549: 9.3.2.1, 11.3.2.1
542Click areaThe click area of the menu items should be at least 24 x 24 px (see Use of the pointing device).ShouldWCAG 2.2
ActionKeyClassification
Focusing of the menuDesktop:
  • Application menu: ALT, F6

  • Area menu: TAB

Web: TAB
Required
Exiting the menuDesktop:
  • Application menu: F6, ALT, selection of a menu item, ESC

  • Area menu: TAB

Web:
  • TAB

  • possible selection of a menu item

Required
Opening a sub-menu of the menu
  • Focus in the menu: UP/DOWN ARROW, ENTER

  • Focus in the application: ALT+[shortcut key]

Required
Opening a sub-menu of a sub-menu
  • RIGHT ARROW

  • ENTER

Required
Closing a sub-menu of the menuESCRequired
Closing a sub-menu of a sub-menu
  • ESC

  • LEFT ARROW

Required
Navigating through the menuRIGHT/LEFT ARROW

Note: This must also work if the focus is in a sub-menu, and the use of the arrow key is not required in order to open or close a sub-menu due to the current focus position. In this case, the open sub-menu is closed automatically, and the next sub-menu is opened and the focus is placed on the first sub-menu item.

Required
Navigating through a sub-menuUP/DOWN ARROWRequired
Navigating through the menu or sub-menu[Shortcut key]Recommended
Navigating through the menu (to a menu item before or afterwards with a defined increment)PAGE UP, PAGE DOWN

Note: The increment should match the amount of visible menu items.

Recommended
Selection of a menu itemENTER, [shortcut key]Required
ActionKeyClassification
Opening a sub-menu of the menu if no sub-menu is yet displayedLeft click on the parent menu itemRequired
Opening a sub-menu of the menu if a sub-menu is already displayedHovering over the parent menu itemRequired
Closing a sub-menu of the menuLeft click on the parent menu item, left click on a menu item in the sub-menu (which does not contain another submenu),
click outside the menu
Required
Opening a sub-menu of a sub-menuHovering over the parent menu itemRequired
Closing a sub-menu of a sub-menuHovering over another parent menu item, left click on a menu item in the sub-menu (which does not contain another sub-menu),
click outside the menu
Required
Selection of a menu itemLeft click on the menu itemRequired
No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
543RoleThe menu role must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549:9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5
544RoleThe menu item, menu radio button or menu check box roles must be communicated to the Accessibility API for the menu items (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5
545StatusThe status of the menu items must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Element status).

Note: This applies, for example,

  • to the “open” or “closed” status for menu items with a sub-menu.

  • to the “selected” or “unselected” status for menu radio buttons and menu check boxes.

MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5
546OrientationThe orientation of the menu (vertical or horizontal) must be communicated to the Accessibility API.MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2
547NameIf the menu has a label or description, these must be communicated as the Accessible Name and/or Accessible Description (see Label and Description).

Note 1: If the page contains several menus, they must have a concise and expressive Accessible Name.

Note 2: A sub-menu can be labeled as an Accessible Name by the parent menu item.

MustEN 301 549: 9.2.4.6, 11.2.4.6, 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5, 11.5.2.8
548NameEach menu item must have a concise and expressive Accessible Name.MustEN 301 549: 9.2.4.6, 11.2.4.6, 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5
549NameIf a menu item has a description, it must be communicated as an Accessible Description.MustEN 301 549: 9.2.4.6, 11.2.4.6, 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5
550NameThe group label of the menu items must (if available) be communicated to the Accessibility API.MustEN 301 549: 9.1.3.1, 11.1.3.1
551OperationIt must be possible to access, operate and exit the menu with assistive technology (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: EN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.12, 11.5.2.17
552UpdateUpdates concerning the Accessible Name or status of the menu items must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.15
553Keyboard shortcut, shortcut keyIf the menu item has a keyboard shortcut or a shortcut key, these must be communicated to the Accessibility API.MustEN 301 549: 9.1.3.1, 11.1.3.1
554Desktop: PositionThe size and position of the menu and the menu items must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Focus indicator).MustEN 301 549: 11.5.2.5, 11.5.2.13
555Desktop: Element hierarchyThe parent / child relationships of the elements within the menu must be communicated to the Accessibility API.MustEN 301 549: 11.5.2.9

Online betrachten

Synonyms: Switch with menu, list button

See also: Split button, drop-down list, menu, context menu, button

Menu buttons are for showing a menu (see DIN EN ISO 9241-161: 8.25).

A menu button consists of a text or graphic label and a visual indicator in order to identify the menu button as such (usually a border). The menu button also has a visual indicator which makes reference to the possibility for showing a menu (arrow icon).

Figure 36: Menu button - closed left, open right

The requirements concerning the button and the menu are described in the “button” and/or “menu” section. Here, only the additional requirements are described which result from the fact that a menu can be opened with the button. The requirements concerning the menu and the menu items that it contains only apply if the menu is open.

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
556ContrastThe arrow icon for opening and closing the menu must have a contrast ratio of at least 3:1 with respect to the neighboring color.MustEN 301 549: 9.1.4.11, 11.1.4.11
557ContrastIf the selected menu item only differs from the unselected menu item in the open state due to its color (e.g. foreground or background color), the colors must have a contrast ratio of at least 3:1.

Note: The selected menu item does not have to be color coded or marked with color only. It can be marked with a check box, for example. In this case, the contrast requirements for the color coding are eliminated as long as the check box has sufficient contrasts.

MustEN 301 549: 9.1.4.11, 11.1.4.11

The requirements concerning the button and the menu are described in the “button” and/or “menu” section. Here, only the additional requirements are described which result from the fact that a menu can be opened with the button. The requirements concerning the menu and the menu items that it contains only apply if the menu is open.

ActionKeyClassification
Opening the menuSPACE
ENTER
ALT+DOWN ARROW
Required
Opening the menuDOWN ARROW
UP ARROW
Recommended
Closing the menuESC
SPACE
ENTER
Required
ActionKeyClassification
Opening the menuLeft click on the menu button (label or arrow)Required
Closing the menuLeft click on the menu button (label or arrow)Required
Closing the menuLeft click on a menu item inside the open menuRequired
Closing the menuLeft click outside the menu button and the menuRequired

The requirements concerning the button and the menu are described in the “button” and/or “menu” section. Here, only the additional requirements are described which result from the fact that a menu can be opened with the button. The requirements concerning the menu and the menu items that it contains only apply if the menu is open.

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
558RoleThe menu button role must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see (Accessibility API)).MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5
559StatusThe status of the menu button must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Element status).

Note: This also applies to the “open” or “closed” status.

MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5

Tab group

Online betrachten

Synonyms: Tab, tab panel

See also: Accordion, carousel

Tab groups are used to group and alternately display page areas (see DIN EN ISO 9241-161: 8.43).

A tab group consists of several tabs, the contents of which are displayed on an alternate basis. Each tab has an tab panel with a label which is displayed all the time. The individual tabs are selected using the tab panels. The tab panels are usually arranged horizontally above the tabs. Tab panels can contain interactive elements, such as buttons for removing the tab panel and the corresponding tab.

Figure 37: Tab group

Presentation

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
560ContrastThe label of the tab panel must have a contrast ratio of at least 4.5:1 with respect to the background.MustEN 301 549: 9.1.4.3, 11.1.4.3
561ContrastThe marking of the selected tab panel must have a contrast ratio of at least 3:1 with respect to the background and/or with respect to the presentation of the unselected tab panel.MustEN 301 549: 9.1.4.1, 11.1.4.1, 9.1.4.11, 11.1.4.11
562ContrastIf the tab panels and the tabs are only identifiable as such on the basis of their color design, these colors must have a contrast ratio of at least 3:1 with respect to the neighboring colors.

Note 1: A tab might be recognizable as an interactive element on the basis of its border or its background color, for example.

Note 2: The requirement does not apply if the tab or the tab panel are clearly identifiable as such, because of their position, for example.

MustEN 301 549: 9.1.4.11, 11.1.4.11
563LabelEach tab panel must have a visible label (see Label).MustEN 301 549 9.3.3.2, 11.3.3.2
564Focus visibilityIf a tab panel receives the keyboard focus, the focus indicator must be visible (see Focus indicator).MustEN 301 549: 9.2.4.7, 11.2.4.7
565ResizingAll tab panels must be perceptible and operable with a font size adjustment of up to 400% (and a resulting display width of 320 px) (see Zoom).

Note: The tab panels can, for example,

  • wrap (i.e. they are shown in several successive rows),

  • be initialized with a menu button,

  • be designed so they are scrollable horizontally (e.g. by scrollbar or two buttons).

MustEN 301 549: 9.1.4.10, 11.1.4.10

Operation

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
566Use of the keyboardIt must be possible to access, operate and exit the tab panels with the keyboard (see Use of the keyboard table, below).MustEN 301 549: 9.2.1.1, 11.2.1.1, 9.2.1.2, 11.2.1.2
567Use of the keyboardIf the tab panels contain other interactive elements, it must be possible to use these with the keyboard.MustEN 301 549: 9.2.1.2, 11.2.1.2
568Use of the keyboardThe hidden tab fields and their contents must not receive keyboard focus.MustEN 301 549: 9.1.3.1, 11.1.3.1, 9.2.4.3, 11.2.4.3
569UpdatesWhen the tab panels are focused and navigated through, no change of context may occur.

Note: This means that when focusing on the tab panel, the focus may not be automatically placed on the tab.
It is considered permissible for the corresponding tab to be shown automatically when focusing on a tab panel, however.

MustEN 301 549: 9.3.2.1, 11.3.2.1
570Click areaThe click area of the tab panels should be at least 24 x 24 px (see Use of the pointing device).ShouldWCAG 2.2
571Click areaIf the tab panels contain further interactive elements, their click area should total at least 24 x 24 px (see Use of the pointing device).ShouldWCAG 2.2

Use of the keyboard: tab group

ActionKeyClassification
Focusing of the selected tab panelTABRequired
Exiting the tab panel and navigating to the first element of the selected tabTABRequired
Navigating within the list of tab panelsDesktop:
  • UP/DOWN/RIGHT/LEFT ARROW

  • CTRL+TAB


Web:
UP/DOWN/RIGHT/LEFT ARROW
Required
Quick navigation to the first and/or last tab panelPOS1, ENDRecommended
Switch between tabs (if the focus is in a tab)CTRL+TABRecommended
Showing of the selected tabENTER, SPACE, or automatically when navigating through the list of tab panelsRequired
Operation of interactive elements within the tab panelThe interactive elements within tab panels do not receive keyboard focus separately. The operation takes place
  • using either the context menu, which can be initialized with SHIFT+F10 and/or with the CONTEXT MENU,

  • or through a keyboard shortcut documented in the application and the Help option, such as DELETE in order to remove the tab panels and the corresponding tabs.

Required

Use of the pointing device: tab group

ActionKeyClassification
Showing a tabLeft click on the corresponding tab panelRequired
Enabling of interactive elements within the tab panelsLeft click on the elementRequired

Programming/interfaces

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
572RoleThe tab panel and tab role must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5
573RoleIf the tab panels contain further interactive elements, a note regarding their operability must be communicated to the Accessibility API (e.g. with the context menu or a keyboard shortcut).MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5
575Desktop: Element hierarchyThe parent / child relationships of the tab panels within the tab group must be communicated to the Accessibility API.MustEN 301 549: 11.5.2.9
576StatusThe status of the tab panels and tabs must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Element status).

Note: This also applies to the tab panel status “selected” or “unselected” insofar as the corresponding tab is not automatically shown when navigating to a tab panel.

MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5
577NameThe tab panels must have a concise and expressive Accessible Name.

Note 1: It is recommended that the tab is given the same Accessible Name as the corresponding tab panel.

Note 2: If the tab panels and tabs have a parent label, this must also be communicated to the Accessibility API.

MustEN 301 549: 9.2.4.6, 11.2.4.6, 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5
578NameIf the tab panel has a description, it must be communicated as an Accessible Description.MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5
579OperationIt must be possible to access, operate and exit the tab panels with assistive technology (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.12, 11.5.2.17
580OperationIf the tab panels contain other interactive elements, it must be possible to use these with assistive technology (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.12, 11.5.2.17
581UpdateUpdates concerning the Accessible Name or status of the tab panels must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.15
582Desktop: PositionThe size and position of the tab panels and tabs must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 11.5.2.5, 11.5.2.13

Practical tip: tab groups in Web applications

Screen reader output for tab panel

Screen reader output for tabs

Note: With NVDA, the start and end of the tab is not perceptible. The tabs or content after this should be labeled as regions, so that which specific content is located inside and outside the tabs is perceptible with the screen reader.

HTML

There is no element for tab groups in HTML. Instead, the following can be used:

ARIA

With tab groups, the following should be taken into account:

Further information: tab role - Accessible Rich Internet Applications (WAI-ARIA) 1.2 (w3.org) (External Link), tablist role - Accessible Rich Internet Applications (WAI-ARIA) 1.2 (w3.org) (External Link), tabpanel role - Accessible Rich Internet Applications (WAI-ARIA) 1.2 (w3.org) (External Link), Tabs Pattern | APG | WAI | W3C

Input field (one-line)

Online betrachten

Synonyms: Text field, edit, input, input field, text box, one-line plain text edit control

See also: Input field (multi-line), password input field, spin button, input field with autocomplete function, combined input field

Input fields allow for the inputting and editing of characters (numbers, letters, special characters) (see DIN EN ISO 9241-161: 8.12).

An input field is usually a rectangular area of the page that contrasts with its surroundings due to a border, a line or a different background color, for example. The input field can contain further control elements which are related to the value input.

Figure 38: One-line input field with a label on the left

Presentation

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
583ContrastThe text in the input field must have a contrast of at least 4.5:1.MustEN 301 549: 9.1.4.3, 11.1.4.3
584ContrastThe border or line of the input field must have a contrast ratio of at least 3:1 with respect to the background of the page or the input field.

Alternatively, the contrast ratio between the background color of the page and the input field must be at least 3:1.
MustEN 301 549: 9.1.4.11, 11.1.4.11
585LabelThe input field must have a visible label (see Label)

Note: The labeling can also take place implicitly, e.g.

  • in the case of input fields in tables, using the column and row headings,

  • in the case of a search field, with the search button located behind it.

MustEN 301 549 9.3.3.2, 11.3.3.2
586LabelThe label should not be located in the input field, so that it is visible at all times and cannot be confused with a value.ShouldDIN EN ISO 9241-125: 5.1.14
587Focus visibilityIf the input field receives the keyboard focus, the focus indicator must be visible (see Focus indicator).MustEN 301 549: 9.2.4.7, 11.2.4.7
588Focus visibilityThe default text cursor must be displayed in the input field (see Text cursor).MustEN 301 549: 9.2.4.7, 11.2.4.7, 11.5.2.13
589ValueIf the input field may only contain certain characters or a particular input format is required and this is not apparent from the field label, it is necessary for an input instruction in the description or label to explain the permissible characters or the required input formats.MustEN 301 549: 9.3.3.2, 11.3.3.2
590ValueThe input field should be long enough to display the maximum number of characters without scrolling.

Note 1: For long text inputs, a multi-line input field should be used.

Note 2: This does not apply to font size adjustments of up to 400%.

ShouldDIN EN ISO 9241-143: 6.2.8

Operation

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
591Use of the keyboardIt must be possible to access, operate and exit the input field with the keyboard (see Use of the keyboard table, below).Must9.2.1.1, 11.2.1.1, 9.2.1.2, 11.2.1.2
592Use of the keyboardIf the input field contains other interactive elements such as buttons, these must receive the focus with the tab key after the input field.

Note: This does not apply to interactive elements for which a generally known use of the keyboard is implemented, such as a button for deleting the inputs in the input field. Nor does this apply to elements for which a keyboard shortcut was implemented, insofar as this keyboard shortcut is visually perceptible at the input field and with assistive technology.

MustEN 301 549: 9.2.2.1, 11.2.1.1
593UpdatesWhen focusing and operating the input field, no unexpected change of context may occur.MustEN 301 549: 9.3.2.1, 11.3.2.1, 9.3.2.2, 11.3.2.2
594Click areaThe click area of the input field should be at least 24 x 24 px (see Use of the pointing device).ShouldWCAG 2.2
595Click areaIt should be possible to place the focus on the input field by clicking on the input field or by clicking on the label.Should

Use of the keyboard: input field

ActionKeyClassification
Focusing of the input fieldTABRequired
Exiting the input fieldTABRequired
Entering a value[Inputting of printable characters]

Note: If certain characters cannot be entered, an appropriate implicit or explicit input instruction must be available at the input field. An implicit input instruction might, for example, be the “phone number” label which indicates that no letters can be entered.

Required
Navigating in the input fieldRIGHT/LEFT ARROW
POS1, END
Required
Deleting text in the input fieldDELETE, BACKSPACERequired
Highlighting text in the input fieldSHIFT+[any navigation key],
CTRL+A
Required
Removing the highlighting[any navigation key]Required
Pasting of text from the clipboardCTRL+VRequired
Copying or cutting highlighted textCTRL+C, CTRL+XRequired

Use of the pointing device: input field

ActionKeyClassification
Placing the focus on a specific position in the input fieldLeft click in the input fieldRequired
Placing the focus in the input fieldLeft click on the labelRecommended
Highlighting text in the input fieldDrag with the left mouse button pressedRequired
Highlighting a word in the input fieldDouble clickRecommended
Highlighting all content in the input fieldTriple clickRecommended

Programming/interfaces

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
596RoleThe input field role must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5
597RoleIf the technology used is able identify the input purpose of form fields, the purpose of the form fields must be marked for the data of the respective users (such as surname, date of birth, place of residence) according to https://www.w3.org/TR/WCAG21/#input-purposes".MustEN 301 549: 9.1.3.5, 11.1.3.5.1
598ValueThe value of the input field must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.7
599StatusThe status of the input field must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Element status).MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5
600NameThe input field must have a concise and expressive Accessible Name.MustEN 301 549: 9.2.4.6, 11.2.4.6, 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5, 11.5.2.8
601NameIf the input field has a description, it must be communicated as an Accessible Description.MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5
602OperationIt must be possible to access, operate and exit the input field with assistive technology (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.12, 11.5.2.17
603UpdateUpdates concerning the Accessible Name, value or status of the input field must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.15
604Desktop: PositionThe size and position of the input field must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 11.5.2.5, 11.5.2.13
605Desktop: PositionThe position of the text cursor in the input field must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Focus indicator)MustEN 301 549: 11.5.2.13

Practical tip: one-line input field in Web applications

Screen reader output

HTML

The input field should be implemented with the HTML element <input type=text>. For an input field which is used for entering search terms, <input type=search> can be used. The screen readers output the search field as a normal input field, i.e. the label must indicate the purpose which is the search. The initial value is communicated through the value attribute. The label of the input field should be linked to the input field with the <label for=ID> element. The maximum and minimum required length of the value can be determined with maxlength and minlength. Neither of the values are perceptible visually or with the use of assistive technology. If they are used, a corresponding instruction should be provided at the input field. If a particular input format is required, instead of <input type=text>, the following elements can be used:

These input fields with a predefined format are automatically validated by the browser. The error messages of the browsers, however, are not accessible, and should therefore be replaced or supplemented with specific error messages from the application (see also: Browser validation of the required required attribute in Practical tip: programmatic label of required fields in Web applications.

The input fields for telephone numbers, email and Internet addresses as well as input fields with the pattern attribute are not identifiable either visually or with assistive technology – they are displayed as normal input fields and/or output by the screen reader. They must therefore be labeled in an expressive way and should also have operating instructions for the required input format.

The inputmode attribute can be used to specify which virtual keyboard should be displayed on mobile devices because corresponding details are expected (e.g. inputting of numbers, text, URLs, email addresses). The use of inputmode does not result in an automatic browser validation. Insofar as the keyboard that is used does not result from the type attribute of the input field, the use of inputmode is recommended, as assistive technology is also able to use this information appropriately, to display corresponding virtual keyboards, for example. It should be noted that the inputmode attribute replaces unnecessary input instructions, however.
The placeholder attribute can be used for a placeholder. However, it is recommended to display input instructions next to the field and to link them to the input field using aria-describedby. The placeholder attribute has the following disadvantages:

An input field can be marked as disabled (disabled) and read-only (readonly).

An input field can be marked as a required field with required.

Further information: 4.10.5 The input element - HTML Standard (whatwg.org)

ARIA

If the input field is not implemented with the HTML element, it is also necessary to take account of the following:

Further information: textbox role - Accessible Rich Internet Applications (WAI-ARIA) 1.2 (w3.org) (External Link)

Input field (multi-line)

Online betrachten

Synonyms: Text field, text area, multi-line text input, multiline plain text edit control

See also: Input field (one-line), Rich Text Editor

Multi-line input fields allow for the input of long text contents (see DIN EN ISO 9241-161: 8.45).

A multi-line input field is usually a rectangular area of the page that contrasts with the background due to a border, for example. The border can have a control point for the scaling of the input field. A multi-line input field can have scrollbars. The requirements of the control point and scrollbars are described in the appropriate sections.

Figure 39: Multi-line input field with top label

Presentation

The requirements concerning the input field are described in the “input field” section. Here, only the additional requirements are described which result from the fact that it is an input field with several lines.

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
606ValueIf the display width exceeds 320 px, the multi-line input field must be displayed in such a way that its text content can be read without having to scroll horizontally.MustEN 301 549: 9.1.4.10, 11.1.4.10

Operation

The requirements concerning the input field are described in the “input field” section. Here, only the additional requirements are described which result from the fact that it is an input field with several lines.

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
607Use of the keyboardIf the multi-line input field cannot be exited with the TAB key (because it means TAB steps are inserted in the text), a keyboard shortcut for exiting the field must be implemented and documented in the application.MustEN 301 549: 9.2.1.2, 11.2.1.2

Use of the keyboard: multi-line input field

ActionKeyClassification
Exiting the multi-line input fieldTAB or a documented keyboard shortcutRequired
Entering a value[Inputting of printable characters and ENETER and/or TAB]

Note: If certain characters cannot be entered, an appropriate input instruction must be available at the input field.

Required
Navigating in the multi-line input fieldUP/DOWN/RIGHT/LEFT ARROWRequired
Quick navigation in the multi-line input fieldPOS1, END, PAGE UP, PAGE DOWNRequired

Programming/interfaces

The requirements concerning the input field are described in the “input field” section. Here, only the additional requirements are described which result from the fact that it is an input field with several lines.

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
608RoleThe multi-line input field role must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5
609OperationIt must be possible to access, operate and exit the multi-line input field with assistive technology (see Accessibility API).

Note: If it is not possible to exit the multi-line input field with TAB, in order to exit, the keyboard shortcut must be communicated to the Accessibility API.

MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.12, 11.5.2.17
610UpdateUpdates concerning the Accessible Name, value or status of the multi-line input field must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Accessibility API).

Note: This applies to an updated description of the amount of allowed characters that have been entered or are remaining, for example.

Must9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.12, 11.5.2.17

Practical tip: multi-line input field in Web applications

Screen reader output

Please note:

HTML

Note: Multi-line input fields should only be used if very long inputs are expected or if the inputting of paragraph breaks (ENTER key) must be enabled. Otherwise, a one-line input field should be used, because the accessibility of the multi-line input fields is poorer for users of screen readers.

The input field should be implemented with the HTML element <textarea>.
The initial value is communicated through the text content of the element.
The label of the input field should be linked to the input field with the <label for=ID> element.
The maximum and minimum required length of the value can be determined with maxlength and minlength. Neither of the values are perceptible visually or with the use of assistive technology. If they are used, a corresponding instruction should be provided at the input field.
The visual size of the input field can be set using the cols and rows attributes. It is recommended that the size is defined using CSS instead, so that the multi-line input field can be responsively designed to avoid horizontal scrolling at a screen width of 320 px. The initial size of the input field should be sufficiently large, as keyboard users are not able to change the size of the field – the control point automatically displayed by the browser can only be operated with a pointing device.
The placeholder attribute can be used for a placeholder. However, it is recommended to display input instructions next to the field and to link them to the input field using aria-describedby. The placeholder attribute has the following disadvantages:

An input field can be marked as disabled (disabled) and read-only (readonly). An input field can be marked as a required field with required.

Further information: 4.10.11 The textarea element - HTML Standard (whatwg.org)

ARIA

If the input field is not implemented with the HTML element, it is also necessary to take account of the following:

Further information: textbox role - Accessible Rich Internet Applications (WAI-ARIA) 1.2 (w3.org) (External Link)

Password input field

Online betrachten

Synonyms: Password field

See also: Input field (one-line), authentication

Password input fields allow for the entry of a password.

A password input field is usually a rectangular area of the page that contrasts with its surroundings due to a border, a line or a different background color, for example. The entered value is only displayed in a masked format. A password input field can contain a button to unmask the value.

Figure 40: Password input field

Presentation

The requirements concerning the input field are described in the “input field” section. Here, only the additional requirements are described which result from the fact that it is an input field for entering a password.

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
611ContrastThe masked and unmasked text in the password input field must have a contrast of at least 4.5:1.MustEN 301 549: 9.1.4.3, 11.1.4.3
612ValueIf the password input field may only contain certain characters or a particular input format is required, it is necessary for this to be explained in the input instruction.

Note: This only applies when a new password is given, and not when the password is entered for authentication purposes or if the password is entered repeatedly.

MustEN 301 549: 9.3.3.2, 11.3.3.2

Operation

The requirements concerning the input field are described in the “input field” section. Here, only the additional requirements are described which result from the fact that it is an input field for entering a password.

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
613Use of the keyboardIf the password input field contains other interactive elements such as a button for unmasking the input, these must receive the focus with the tab key after the input field.

Note: This does not apply to elements for which a Tastaturkürzel has been implemented, insofar as this keyboard shortcut is visually perceptible at the password input field and with assistive technology.

MustEN 301 549: 9.2.1.1, 11.2.1.1

Programming/interfaces

The requirements concerning the input field are described in the “input field” section. Here, only the additional requirements are described which result from the fact that it is an input field for entering a password.

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
614RoleThe password input field role must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5
615ValueThe value of the password input field may not be communicated to the Accessibility API unless the masking of the entry was removed. Instead of this, a masked character string must be communicated as a value to the Accessibility API (see Accessibility API).

Note: The masked character string to be used for the Accessibility API is a character string consisting of an amount of “black dot” (•) points corresponding to the length of the input.

MustEN 301 549: 4.2.11, 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.7
616StatusThe status of the password input field must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Element status).

Note: This also applies to the “masked” or “unmasked” status. Accordingly, the password input field can be communicated without masking to the Accessibility API with the input field role.

MustEN 301 549: 9.4.2.1, 11.4.2.1

Practical tip: password input field in Web applications

Screenreader output

Please note:

HTML

To prevent the entered password from being output by the assistive technology, the password input field must be implemented with the HTML element <input type=password>.
The label of the password input field should be linked to the password input field with the <label for=ID> element.
A password input field can be marked as disabled (disabled) and read-only (readonly). A password input field can be marked as a required field with required.
If specific rules apply when assigning the password, the following should be observed:

Further information: 4.10.5.1.6 Password state (type=password) - HTML Standard (whatwg.org)

ARIA

There is no role for password input fields in ARIA. Instead, the appropriate HTML element must be used for password input fields so that the password to be entered is not output by the assistive technology.

Input field with autocomplete function

Online betrachten

Synonyms: Input field with suggestion list, autocomplete search, auto suggestion box

See also: selection list, drop-down list, menu button, input field (one-line),, combined input field

Input fields with the autocomplete function allow for text to be entered freely and the selection of options from a list, whereby the list is only opened after the text has been input.

In the closed state, an input field with autocomplete function consists of a single input field. In the opened state, a selection list is displayed underneath (possibly with a scrollbar). The options of the selection list can be grouped. The labeling of the groups cannot be selected.

Input fields with the autocomplete function can also add the first hit to the input field automatically, so that this can be adopted immediately (Inline-Autocomplete). In this case, the text cursor remains at the position of the last character entered.

Figure 41: Input field with autocomplete function

Presentation

The requirements concerning the input field are described in the “input field” section. Here, only the additional requirements are described which result from the fact that it is an input field with autocomplete function.

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
617ContrastThe labeling of the options in the selection list of the autocomplete function must have a contrast of at least 4.5:1.MustEN 301 549: 9.1.4.3, 11.1.4.3
618ContrastThe selected option in the selection list of the autocomplete function must have a contrast of at least 3:1 with respect to the neighboring options.MustEN 301 549: 9.1.4.11, 11.1.4.11
619Focus visibilityIn the case of keyboard navigation through the list entries, the current option must be displayed in the visible area.MustEN 301 549: 11.2.4.7

Operation

The requirements concerning the input field are described in the “input field” section. Here, only the additional requirements are described which result from the fact that it is an input field with autocomplete function.

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
620Use of the keyboardIt must be possible to access, operate and exit the options in the selection list of the autocomplete function with the keyboard (see Use of the keyboard table, below).MustEN 301 549: 9.2.1.1, 11.2.1.1, 9.2.1.2, 11.2.1.2
621UpdatesWhen focusing and operating the input field with the autocomplete function, no unexpected change of context may occur.MustEN 301 549: 11.3.2.1 und 11.3.2.2
622Click areaThe click area of the list entries in the selection list should be at least 24 x 24 px.ShouldWCAG 2.2: 2.5.8 (AA)

Use of the keyboard: input field with autocomplete function

ActionKeyClassification
Opening of the selection listText inputRequired
Closing the selection listENTER
ESC
TAB
Text input that does not lead to any results from the autocomplete function
Reauired
Operation of the selection list (selection of the previous or following value)UPP ARROW, DOWN ARROWRequired
Operation of the selection list (selection of a value before or after with a defined increment)PAGE UP, PAGE DOWN

Note: The increment should correspond to the amount of visible options.

Recommended

Use of the pointing device: input field with autocomplete function

ActionKeyClassification
Closing the selection listLeft click on a value within the open listRequired
Closing the selection listLeft click outside the combined input field (consisting of the input field and the selection list)Required
Value selection within the selection listLeft click on a valueRequired

Programming/interfaces

The requirements concerning the input field are described in the “input field” section. Here, only the additional requirements are described which result from the fact that it is an input field with autocomplete function.

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
623RoleThe input field role must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Accessibility API)

Note: If the technology used does not know the input field with autocomplete function role, the input field role must be used. In this case, the description should make reference to the autocomplete function.

MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5
624Desktop: Element hierarchyThe parent / child relationships of the elements within the list must be communicated to the Accessibility API.MustEN 301 549: 911.5.2.9
624StatusThe status of the selection list of the autocomplete function must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Elementstatus).

Note: This applies to the “open” or “closed” status, for example.

MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5, 1.5.2.9
625NameThe group label of the list entries must (if available) be communicated to the Accessibility API.MustEN 301 549: 9.1.3.1, 11.1.3.1
626OperationIt must be possible to access, operate and exit the selection list of the autocomplete function with assistive technology (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.12, 11.5.2.17
627UpdateUpdates concerning the Accessible Name, value or status of the combined input field must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Accessibility API).

Note: This applies in particular to the displaying of the selection list of the autocomplete function, as otherwise it is not perceptible that values are available for selection.

MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.15
628Desktop: PositionThe size and position of the selected elements in the selection list must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Focus indicator))MustEN 301 549: 11.5.2.13

Spin button

Online betrachten

Synonyms: Rotary button, step forward button, spinner, spin control

See also: Input field, slider, drop-down list, combined input field, button

Spin buttons allow for the selection of a value from a range of values with continuous data (e.g., days of the week, years). A spin button consists of two buttons that allow for the selection of the previous value and the following value as well as an input field in order to display the value. The input field for displaying the value can be read-only or allow for the direct text input. The value range of the spin button can be limited or unlimited, i.e. it can have a minimum value, a maximum value or both (see DIN EN ISO 9241-161: 8.41).

Figure 42: Spin button

Presentation

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
629ContrastThe text in the spin button must have a contrast ratio of at least 4.5:1 with respect to the background.MustEN 301 549: 9.1.4.3, 11.1.4.3
630ContrastThe border of the spin button must have a contrast ratio of at least 3:1 with respect to the background.MustEN 301 549: 9.1.4.11, 11.1.4.11
631ContrastThe arrow icons for the selection of the previous and following value must have a contrast ratio of at least 3:1 with respect to the neighboring color.MustEN 301 549: 9.1.4.11, 11.1.4.11
632LabelThe spin button must have a visible label (see label).MustEN 301 549 9.3.3.2, 11.3.3.2
633Fokus visibilityIf the spin button receives the keyboard focus, the focus indicator must be visible (see Focus indicator).MustEN 301 549: 9.2.4.7, 11.2.4.7
634Focus visibilityIf it is possible to enter text in the spin button, the default text cursor must be displayed (see Textcursor).MustEN 301 549: 9.2.4.7, 11.2.4.7, 11.5.2.13

Operation

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
635Use of the keyboardIt must be possible to access, operate and exit the spin button with the keyboard (see Use of the keyboard table, below).

Note: The button for the selection of the previous and following value should not receive the keyboard focus separately

MustEN 301 549: 9.2.1.1, 11.2.1.1, 9.2.1.2, 11.2.1.2
636UpdatesWhen focusing and operating the spin button, no unexpected change of context may occur.MustEN 301 549: 9.3.2.1, 11.3.2.1 und 9.3.2.2, 11.3.2.2
637KlickbereichIf it is not possible for a value to be entered, the click area of the buttons for the selection of the previous and following values should be at least 24 x 24 px (see Use of the pointing device).ShouldWCAG 2.2

Use of the keyboard: spin button

ActionKeyClassification
Focusing of the spin buttonTABRequired
Leaving the spin buttonTABRequired
Entering a value in the input fieldText inputRequired (if text input is possible)
Navigating in the input fieldRIGHT/LEFT ARROW
POS1, END
Required (if text input is possible)
Operation of the spin button (selection of the previous or following value)UP ARROW, DOWN ARROWRequired
Operation of the spin button (selection of a value before or after with a defined increment)PAGE UP, PAGE DOWN

Note: The increment depends on the amount of possible values. An increment of 10 for instance, would make sense with 100 values.

Recommended
Operation of the spin button (selection of the first and last value)POS1, ENDRecommended (if no text input is possible and a range of values exists)

Use of the pointing device: spin button

ActionKeyClassification
Placing the focus on a specific position in the input fieldLeft click in the input fieldRequired (if text input is possible)
Selection of the previous or following valueLeft click on the corresponding button with the arrow iconRequired

Programming/interfaces

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
638RoleThe spin button role must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5
639ValueThe value of the spin button must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.7
640Desktop: Value rangeIf the spin button has a minimum and maximum value, it must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 11.5.2.7
641StatusThe status of the spin button must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Elementstatus).

Note: This also applies to the “text input possible” or “text input not possible” status.

MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5
642NameThe spin button must have a concise and expressive Accessible Name.MustEN 301 549: 9.2.4.6, 11.2.4.6, 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5, 11.5.2.8
643NameIf the spin button has a description, it must be communicated as an Accessible Description.MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5
644OperationIt must be possible to access, operate and exit the spin button with assistive technology (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.12, 11.5.2.17
645UpdateUpdates concerning the Accessible Name, value or status of the spin button must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.15
646Desktop: PositionThe size and position of the spin button must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Focus indicator).MustEN 301 549: 11.5.2.5
647Desktop: PositionIf the input field is not read-only, the position of the text cursor in the input field must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Focus visibility)MustEN 301 549: 11.5.2.13

Practical tip: spin button in Web applications

Screen reader output

Please note:

HTML

The spin button should be implemented with the HTML element <input type=number> The initial value is communicated through the value attribute
The increment as well as the minimum and maximum values can be communicated with the step, min und max attributes.
The label of the spin button should be linked to the spin button with the <label for=ID> element.
A spin button can be marked as disabled (disabled) and read-only (readonly) ausgezeichnet werden. A spin button can be marked as a required field with required.

Further information: 4.10.5.1.12 Number state (type=number) - HTML Standard (whatwg.org)

ARIA

Please note: On mobile devices, an ARIA spin button without text input may not be operated with assistive technology, because no gesture commands for the operation of non-native spin buttons have been implemented. This applies, in particular, if the buttons for increasing and/or decreasing the value are child elements of the spin button. In addition to this, the differences between spin buttons with and without text input are not perceptible with most screen readers. It is therefore recommended that only spin buttons with a text input option are implemented.

If the spin button is not implemented with the HTML element, it is also necessary to take account of the following:

Further information: spinbutton role - Accessible Rich Internet Applications (WAI-ARIA) 1.2 (w3.org) (External Link), Spinbutton Pattern | APG | WAI | W3C

Selection list

Online betrachten

Synonyms: List field, multi-line selection list, list box

See also: Multiple selection list, drop-down list, radio button group, tree structure

Selection lists allow the selection of an option from a list (see DIN EN ISO 9241-161: 8.39).

All the available options are displayed in the selection list (with scrollbars)if necessary). The current value is highlighted. The options can be grouped. The labeling of the groups cannot be selected. The focused option is identical to the selected option.

Figure 43: Selection list

Presentation

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
648ContrastThe labeling of the options in the selection list must have a contrast of at least 4.5:1.

Note 1: This applies to both the selected and unselected options.

Note 2: If the options are labeled with graphics rather than text, the contrast of the graphics with respect to the background and the content-bearing areas of the graphics with respect to each other must be at least 3:1.

MustEN 301 549: 9.1.4.3, 11.1.4.3, 9.1.4.11, 11.1.4.11
649ContrastIf the selected option only differs from the unselected option due to its color (e.g. foreground or background color), a contrast ratio between the colors of at least 3:1 must be complied with.

Note: The selected list entry does not have to be color coded or marked with color only. It can be marked with a check box, for example. In this case, the contrast requirements for the color coding are eliminated as long as the check box has sufficient contrasts.

MustEN 301 549: 9.1.4.11, 11.1.4.11
650ContrastThe border of the selection list must have a contrast ratio of at least 3:1 with respect to the background.MustEN 301 549: 9.1.4.11, 11.1.4.11
651LabelThe selection list must have a visible label (see Label).MustEN 301 549 9.3.3.1, 11.3.3.2
652Focus visibilityIf the selection list receives the keyboard focus, the focus indicator must be visible (see Focus indicator).MustEN 301 549: 9.2.4.7, 11.2.4.7
653Focus visibilityWhen navigating through the options, the current option must be displayed in the visible area and as focused.MustEN 301 549: 9.2.4.7, 11.2.4.7
654Options listIt should not be necessary to scroll the list with the options horizontally, i.e. it should be at least as wide as the longest entry.ShouldDIN EN ISO 9241-143: 9.3.4
655Options listDie Optionen sollen so formuliert werden, dass die relevante, zur Unterscheidung dienende Information am Anfang steht.ShouldDIN EN ISO 9241-143: 9.3.4

Operation

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
656Use of the keyboardDIt must be possible to access, operate and exit the selection list with the keyboard (see Use of the keyboard table, below).MustEN 301 549: 9.2.1.1, 11.2.1.1, 9.2.1.2, 11.2.1.25
657UpdatesWhen focusing and operating the selection list, no unexpected change of context may occur.

Note: In particular, the change in value may not result in a loss of focus or the opening of a new screen.

MustEN 301 549: 9.3.2.1, 11.3.2.1, 9.3.2.2, 11.3.2.2
658Click areaThe click area of the list entries in the selection list should be at least 24 x 24 px.ShouldWCAG 2.2

Use of the keyboard: selection list

ActionKeyClassification
Focusing of the selection listTABRequired
Exiting the selection listTABRequired
Operation of the selection list (selection of the previous or following value)UP ARROW, DOWN ARROWRequired
Operation of the selection list (selection of the first and last value)POS1, ENDRequired
Operation of the selection list (selection of a value before or after with a defined increment)PAGE UP, PAGE DOWN

Hinweis: Note: The increment should correspond to the amount of visible options.

Required with several list entries
Operation of the selection list (selection of a value which starts with a specific character string)Entry of one or more characters (within a short time)

Note: If two entries start with the same character string, the entries are navigated to one another in sequence.

Required with several list entries

Zeigeinstrumentbedienung Auswahlliste

ActionKeyClassification
Value selection within the selection listLeft click on a valueRequired

Programming/interfaces

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
659RoleThe selection list role must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5
660ValueThe value of the selection list must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.7
661Desktop: Element hierarchyThe parent / child relationships of the elements within the selection list must be communicated to the Accessibility API.MustEN 301 549: 11.5.2.9
662StatusThe status of the selection list must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Elementstatus).MustEN 301 549: 69.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5
663NameThe selection list must have a concise and expressive Accessible Name.MustEN 301 549: 9.2.4.6, 11.2.4.6, 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5, 11.5.2.8
664NameIf the selection list has a description, it must be communicated as an Accessible Description.MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5
665NameThe group label of the list entries must (if available) be communicated to the Accessibility API.MustEN 301 549: 9.1.3.1, 11.1.3.1
666OperationIt must be possible to access, operate and exit the selection list with assistive technology (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.12, 11.5.2.17
667UpdateUpdates concerning the Accessible Name, value or status of the selection list must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.15
668PositionThe size and position of the selection list must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Focus indicator).MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.15
669Desktop: PositionThe size and position of the selected elements in the selection list must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Focus visibility)MustEN 301 549: 11.5.2.5, 11.5.2.13

Practical tip: selection list in Web applications

Screen reader output

During focusing of the selection list:

When navigating through the selection list with the arrow keys:

On reading with the virtual cursor:

Please note:

HTML

The selection list should be implemented with the HTML elements <select> and <option> with a value greater than 1 with the size attribut und without the multiple attribute.
The list entries can be grouped with the <optgroup> element. The grouping should be avoided, however, as many screen readers do not output the group label (which is specified with the label attribut).
The initially selected list entry can be set with the selected attribut. An initial list entry should be selected in each selection list, as keyboard users automatically make a selection when navigating through the selection list which cannot be undone. The list entry should be initially selected which is either most likely to be selected or which contains a neutral option (e.g. “not applicable”).
The label should be linked to the selection list with the <label for=ID> element.
A selection list, a group of list entries and the individual list entries can be marked as disabled (disabled), but not read-only (readonly).
A selection list can be marked as a required field with required.

Further information: 4.10.7 The select element - HTML Standard (whatwg.org)

ARIA

If the selection list is not implemented with the HTML element, it is also necessary to take account of the following:

Further information: listbox role - Accessible Rich Internet Applications (WAI-ARIA) 1.2 (w3.org) (External Link), Listbox Pattern | APG | WAI | W3C

Multiple selection list

Online betrachten

Synonyme: List field, multi-line selection list, list box

See also: Selection list, drpo-down list, check box group, tree structur

Multiple selection lists allow the selection of several options from a list (see DIN EN ISO 9241-161: 8.39).

All the selectable options are displayed in the multiple selection list (with scrollbrars if necessary). The selected options are highlighted. The options can be grouped. The labeling of the groups cannot be selected. The focused option is not automatically identical to the selected option.

Figure 44: Multiple selection list (the check mark indicates selected options, the blue background color indicates the currently focused option)

Presentation

The requirements concerning the selection list are described in the “selection list” section. Here, only the additional requirements are described which result from the fact that it is a selection list with multiple selection.

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
670LabelThe multiple selection list must have a visible label (see Label).

Note: Users should be made aware of the possibility for multiple selection.

MustEN 301 549 9.3.3.2, 11.3.3.2
671DescriptionIf the multiple selection is not possible by simply activating the list entries, the operation with the keyboard and pointing device should be explained (see Practical tip: simplified use of multiple selection).ShouldWCAG 2.1: 3.3.5 (AAA), DIN EN ISO 9241-143: 9.6.11

Operation

The requirements concerning the selection list are described in the “selection list” section. Here, only the additional requirements are described which result from the fact that it is a selection list with multiple selection.

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
672It must be possible to access, operate and exit the multiple selection list with the keyboard (see Use of the keyboard table, below).

Note: This applies to the selection of neighboring and non-neighboring list entries.

MustEN 301 549: 9.2.1.2, 11.2.1.2

Use of the keyboard: multiple selection list

Note: A simplified but currently less established use of the multiple selection feature is described in the practical tip on the simplified use of multiple selection. It is recommended that the implemented operation concerning multiple selection is described in the application or the Help option, regardless of the method chosen

ActionKeyClassification
Focusing of the multiple selection listTABRequired
Value selection (all other values are deselected)[Navigation key]Required
Selection of neighboring valuesSHIFT+[Navigation key]Required
Selection of non-neighboring valuesCTRL+[Navigation key], gefolgt von CTRL+SPACERequired
Deselect a selected valueCTRL+SPACERequired
Select all valuesCTRL+ARequired

Use of the pointing device: multiple selection list

Note: A simplified but currently less established use of the multiple selection feature is described in the practical tip: simplified use of multiple selection. It is recommended that the implemented operation concerning multiple selection is described in the application or the Help option, regardless of the method chosen.

ActionKeyClassification
Value selection (all other values are deselected)Left click on a valuetRequired
Selection of neighboring valuesSHIFT+Left clickRequired
Selection of non-neighboring valuesCTRL+Left clickRequired
Deselect a selected valueCTRL+Left clickRequired

Programming/interfaces

The requirements concerning the selection list are described in the “selection list” section. Here, only the additional requirements are described which result from the fact that it is a selection list with multiple selection.

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
673RoleThe multiple selection list role must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.511.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5
674OperationIt must be possible to access, operate and exit the multiple selection list with assistive technology (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.12, 11.5.2.17.5.2.17

Practical tip: alternatives to the selection list with multiple selection

The possibility for multiple selection is not generally identifiable, as the multiple selection lists do not differ visually from the selection list. Moreover, multiple selection (in particular the selection of non-neighboring values) with the keyboard and the pointing device is difficult. In addition, the selected elements are often imperceptible with the screen reader. It is therefore recommended to replace multiple selection lists with other elements, to implement them in a simple form, or to describe their function and operation. Alternatives to multiple selection lists include:

Abbildung: Figure 45: Multiple selection list (WAI-ARIA Authoring Practices 1.2: Listbox > Example Listboxes with Rearrangeable Options)

A simple use of multiple selection lists can be implemented as follows:

Practical tip: simplified use of multiple selection

A simple use of multiple selection lists can be implemented as follows:

Practical tip: multiple selection list in Web applications

Screen reader output

Please note: In the form mode, the selected list entries are imperceptible with the screen reader. The possibility for multiple selection is partly imperceptible. The use of an alternative element is therefore recommended (see Practical tip: alternatives to the selection list with multiple selection).

HTML

Please note: The use of the keyboard is also difficult for the following reasons:

The use of an alternative element is therefore recommended (see Practical tip: alternatives to the selection list with multiple selection).

The implementation instructions for the HTML selection list are described in the “selection list” section. Here, only the additional instructions are given, which result from the fact that it is a selection list with multiple selection.

ARIA

The implementation instructions for the ARIA selection list are described in the “selection list” section. Here, only the additional instructions are given, which result from the fact that it is a selection list with multiple selection.

Tree structure

Online betrachten

Synonyms: Hierarchical list, tree, tree view, structure view

See also: selection list, multiple selection list, hierarchical table, menu

Tree structures enable the presentation and operation of hierarchically structured lists (see DIN EN ISO 9241-161: 8.17). The nested lists can be shown and hidden. A button with an indicator on the list entries shows whether the subordinate list is shown or hidden. Tree structures can be used for different purposes, for example:

Figure 46: Tree structure

Presentation

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
675ContrastThe labeling of the list entries in the tree structure must have a contrast of at least 4.5:1.

Note 1: This applies to both the selected and unselected entries.

Note 2: If the list entries are labeled with graphics rather than text, the contrast of the graphics with respect to the background and the content-bearing areas of the graphics with respect to each other must be at least 3:1.

MustEN 301 549: 9.1.4.3, 11.1.4.3, 9.1.4.11, 11.1.4.11
676ContrastIf the selected list entry only differs from the unselected list entry due to its color (e.g. foreground or background color), the colors must have a contrast ratio of at least 3:1.

Note: The selected list entry does not have to be color coded or marked with color only. It can be marked with a check box, for example. In this case, the contrast requirements for the color coding are eliminated as long as the check box has sufficient contrasts.

MustEN 301 549: 9.1.4.1, 11.1.4.1, 9.1.4.11, 11.1.4.11
677ContrastIcons that display the status of list entries (shown or hidden) must have a contrast ratio of at least 3:1 with respect to the background.MustEN 301 549: 9.1.4.11, 11.1.4.11
678LabelIf it serves as a form element, the tree structure must have a visible label (see Label).MustEN 301 549 9.3.3.2, 11.3.3.2
679Focus visibilityIf the tree structure receives the keyboard focus, the focus indicator must be visible (see Focus indicator).MustEN 301 549: 9.2.4.7, 11.2.4.7
680Focus visibilityWhen navigating through the list entries, the current list entry must be displayed in the visible area.MustEN 301 549: 9.2.4.7, 11.2.4.7
681Option listIt should not be necessary to scroll the tree structure horizontally, i.e. it should be at least as wide as the longest entry.MustEN 301 549: 9.2.1.1, 11.2.1.1
682Option listThe list entries should be formulated in such a way that the information that serves the purpose of differentiation is at the beginning.ShouldDIN EN ISO 9241-143: 9.3.4

Operation

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
683Use of the keyboardIt must be possible to access, operate and exit the tree structure with the keyboard (see Use of the keyboard table, below).

Note: The buttons for showing and hiding the subordinate list entries should not receive the keyboard focus separately.

MustEN 301 549: 9.2.1.1, 11.2.1.1, 9.2.1.2, 11.2.1.2
684UpdateWhen focusing and operating the tree structure, no unexpected change of context may occur.MustEN 301 549: 9.3.2.1, 11.3.2.1, 9.3.2.2, 11.3.2.
685Click areaThe elements for showing and hiding subordinate lists should be at least 24 x 24 px in size.ShouldWCAG 2.2
686Click areaThe click area of the list entries in the tree structure should be at least 24 x 24 px.ShouldWCAG 2.2

Use of the keyboard: tree structure

ActionKeyClassification
Focusing of the tree structureTABRequired
Exiting the tree structureTABRequired
Navigating to the previous or following valueUP ARROW, DOWN ARROWRequired
Quick navigation to the first and last valuePOS1, ENDRequired
Quick navigation to a value before or after with a defined incrementPAGE UP, PAGE DOWN

Note: The increment should match the amount of visible entries in the list.

Recommended
Navigating to the first entry in the nested listRIGHT ARROWRequired
Show subordinate listRIGHT ARROWRequired
Hide subordinate listLEFT ARROWRequired
Select value, enabling list entrySPACE, ENTERRequired

Note 1: In the case of tree structures with multiple selection, moreover, the use of the keyboard for the multiple selection should be implemented as described for the multiple selection list.
Note 2: The use of the keyboard for tree structures may differ from the standard described here depending on the programming language or framework to be used (e.g. showing and hiding of subordinate lists with PLUS and MINUS). The alternate use of the keyboard should be described in the application and Help option.

Use of the pointing device: tree structure
ActionKeyClassification
Select value, enabling list entryLeft clickRequired
Show and hide subordinate listLeft click on the show and hide iconRequired
Show and hide subordinate listDouble-click on list entryRecommended

Note: In the case of tree structures with multiple selection, moreover, the use of the pointing device for the multiple selection should be implemented as described for the multiple selection list.

Programming/interfaces

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
687RoleThe tree structure role must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5
688ValueThe values of the tree structure must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.7
689Desktop: Element hierarchyThe parent / child relationships of the elements within the tree structure must be communicated to the Accessibility API.

Note: If this is not possible, the hierarchy of the list entries must be communicated to the Accessibility API in another way, e.g. in text form

MustEN 301 549: 11.5.2.9
690StatusThe status of the tree structure and the list entries must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Element status).

Note: With the list entries, this also applies to the “open” or “closed” status.

MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5
691NameThe tree structure must have a concise and expressive Accessible Name.MustEN 301 549: 9.2.4.6, 11.2.4.6, 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5, 11.5.2.
692NameIf the tree structure has a description, it must be communicated as an Accessible Description.MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5
693OperationIt must be possible to access, operate and exit the tree structure with assistive technology (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.12, 11.5.2.17
694UpdateUpdates concerning the Accessible Name, value or status of the tree structure must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.15
695PositionThe size and position of the tree structure and its list entries must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Focus indicator).MustEN 301 549: 11.5.2.5, 11.5.2.13

Practical tip: tree structures in Web applications

Screen reader output

During focusing of the tree structure:

When navigating through the tree structure with the arrow keys:

On reading with the virtual cursor:

Please note:

HTML

There is no element for tree structures in HTML. Instead, the following can be used:

ARIA

With tree structures, the following should be taken into account:

Further Information: tree role - Accessible Rich Internet Applications (WAI-ARIA) 1.2 (w3.org) (External Link), treeitem role - Accessible Rich Internet Applications (WAI-ARIA) 1.2 (w3.org) (External Link), Tree View Pattern | APG | WAI | W3C

Control point

Online betrachten

Synonyms: Drag point, handle

See also: Section separator

A control point is used for the spatial editing of an element such as a graphic, a text block or an application window (see DIN EN ISO 9241-161: 8.16). The control point can, for instance, be used to scale, rotate, distort, or move the element.

A control point often consists of a small circle or square at the corners of the editable element. The editing options can also be shown on the control point. Control points are often only displayed when the corresponding element has focus. With application windows, the control point can also be invisible. A control point can have a context menu for further functions.

Figure 47: Control point

Presentation

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
696ContrastThe control point must have a contrast ratio of at least 3:1 with respect to the background.MustEN 301 549: 9.1.4.11, 11.1.4.11
697Focus visibilityIf the control point receives the keyboard focus, the focus indicator must be visible (see Focus indicator).MustEN 301 549: 9.2.4.7, 11.2.4.7

Operation

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
698Use of the keyboardIt must be possible to access, operate and exit the control point with the keyboard (see Use of the keyboard table, below).
Alternatively, it must be possible to run all the functions of the control point with the keyboard. In this case, the use of the keyboard for the control point must be explained in the application and/or Help option. This does not apply to the control points of the application window if default operation has been implemented for them.
Exception: If the control point has no relevant function, it does not have to be keyboard-operable. This is the case, for example, if the control point is used to scale a display area, if all content is fully perceptible in the standard display, and if the scaling does not add any value.
MustEN 301 549: 9.2.1.1, 11.2.1.1, 9.2.1.2, 11.2.1.2
699Use of the pointing deviceThe use of the pointing device for the control point may not be complex.

Please note: Complex use of the pointing device means

  • multipoint operation (e.g. swiping with several fingers),

  • path-based operation (where the start and end points of the use of the pointing device are not just relevant, but at least one intermediate point is).

MustEN 301 549: 9.2.5.1, 11.2.5.1
700Use of the pointing deviceIt should also be possible to operate the control point without the dragging use of the pointing device.

Note: This can be achieved, for example, by clicking on the control point and then clicking on the target position.

MustWCAG 2.2
701Click areaThe click area of the control point should be at least 24 x 24 px (see Use of the pointing device).ShouldWCAG 2.2

Use of the keyboard: control point

Note: The following requirements only apply if the control point receives the focus with the keyboard.

Possible alternative forms of operation for keyboard users can be, for instance:

ActionKeyClassification
Focusing of the control pointTABRequired
Exiting the control pointTABRequired
Operating the control pointUP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT ARROWRequired
Operating the control point with defined incrementCTRL+UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT ARROWRecommended
Proportional scalingSHIFT+UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT ARROWRecommended

Use of the pointing device: control point

ActionKeyClassification
Operating the control pointDragging the control point (drag and drop)Required
Operating the control pointLeft click to enable and move the pointing device, left click on the target positionRecommended
Proportional scalingSHIFT + dragging of the control pointRecommended

Programming/interfaces

Note: The following requirements only apply if the control point receives the focus with the keyboard.

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
702RoleThe control point role must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5
703ValueThe value of the control point (e.g. rotation in degrees) must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.7
704Desktop: Value rangeThe minimum and maximum value of the control point must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 11.5.2.7
705StatusThe status of the control point must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Element status).MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5
706NameThe control point must have a concise and expressive Accessible Name.

Note: A control point typically has no visible label. The name of the control point should describe the function (for example, “lower vertical scaling”).

MustEN 301 549: 9.2.4.6, 11.2.4.6, 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5
707NameIf the control point has a description, it must be communicated as an Accessible Description.MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5
708OperationIt must be possible to access, operate and exit the control point with assistive technology (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.12, 11.5.2.17
709UpdateUpdates concerning the Accessible Name, value or status of the control point must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.15
710Desktop: PositionThe size and position of the control point must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Focus indicator).MustEN 301 549: 11.5.2.5

Combined input field

Online betrachten

Synonyms: Combination field, combo box

See also: Selection list, drop-down list, menu button, input field with autocomplete function

Combined input fields allow for text input and the selection of options from a list, where the list can be opened and closed (see DIN EN ISO 9241-161: 8.7).

In the closed state, a combined input field consists of an input field and a button (with arrow icon) for opening the list, which is located to the right of the input field. In the opened state, a selection list is displayed underneath (possibly with a scrollbar). The options of the selection list can be grouped. The labeling of the groups cannot be selected.

Combined input fields can be implemented very differently. The implementation variants include:

Figure 48: Combined input field

Presentation

The requirements concerning the input field and the selection list are described in the “input field” and/or “selection list” section. Here, only the additional requirements are described which result from the fact that a selection list can be opened with the input field.

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
711ContrastThe arrow icon for opening and closing the list must have a contrast ratio of at least 3:1 with respect to the neighboring color.MustEN 301 549: 9.1.4.11, 11.1.4.11

Operation

The requirements concerning the input field and the selection list are described in the “input field” and/or “selection list” section. Here, only the additional requirements are described which result from the fact that a selection list can be opened with the input field.

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
712Use of the keyboardIt must be possible to access, operate and exit the combined input field with the keyboard (see Use of the keyboard table, below).

Note: The button for showing and hiding the selection list should not receive the keyboard focus separately.

MustEN 301 549: 11.2.1.1 und 11.2.1.2; ISO 9241-171: 9.2.1.1, 11.2.1.1, 9.2.1.2, 11.2.1.2
713Click areaThe click area of the arrow for opening and closing the selection list should be at least 24 x 24 px (see Use of the pointing device).ShouldWCAG 2.2

Use of the keyboard: combined input field

ActionKeyClassification
Opening of the selection listDesktop:
  • ALT+DOWN ARROW

  • UP/DOWN ARROW

  • F4

  • Text input

Web:
  • ALT+DOWN ARROW

  • UP/DOWN ARROW

  • Text input

Required
Closing the selection listDesktop:
  • ALT+UP ARROW

  • ENTER

  • F4

  • ESC

  • TAB

Web:
  • ALT+UP ARROW

  • ENTER

  • ESC

  • TAB

Required

Use of the pointing device: combined input field

ActionKeyClassification
Opening of the selection listLeft click on the arrowRequired
Closing the selection listLeft click on the arrowRequired
Closing the selection listLeft click on a value within the open listRequired
Closing the selection listLeft click outside the combined input field (consisting of the input field and the selection list)Required

Programming/interfaces

The requirements concerning the input field and the selection list are described in the “input field” and/or “selection list” section. Here, only the additional requirements are described which result from the fact that a selection list can be opened with the input field.

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
714RoleThe combined input field role must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5
715StatusThe status of the combined input field must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Element status).

Note: This also applies to the “open” or “closed” status.

MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5

Practical tip: combined input field in Web applications

Screen reader output

HTML

The combined input field should be implemented with the HTML elements <input type=… list=ID> and <datalist id=ID> and <option>.

The initial value is communicated through the value attribute at the <input> element.

The label should be linked to the combined input field with the <label for=ID> element.

The combined input field can be marked as a required field (required), as disabled (disabled) and/or as read-only (readonly).

The list entries cannot be marked as disabled or read-only. The list entries cannot be grouped.

Further information: 4.10.8 The datalist element - HTML Standard (whatwg.org), 4.10.5.3.9 The list attribute - HTML Standard (whatwg.org)

ARIA

Please note: As the ARIA specification regarding combobox has changed fundamentally several times in recent years, it cannot be guaranteed that the combined input fields implemented with ARIA will be correctly output by all screen readers. The use of the native combined input field is therefore recommended instead. Alternatively, the ARIA implementation should be thoroughly tested with differing browsers and screen readers.
Please note: The ARIA pattern for combined input fields is often used for input fields with autocomplete function or drop-down lists. These three elements differ in their meaning and operation, however, and should not be mixed up.

If the combined input field is not implemented with the HTML elements, it is also necessary to take account of the following:

Further information: combobox role - Accessible Rich Internet Applications (WAI-ARIA) 1.2 (w3.org) (External Link), Combobox Pattern | APG | WAI | W3C

Online betrachten

Synonyms: Dropdown, dropdown list field, combobox

See also: Selection list, combined input field, menu button, input field with autocomplete function

Drop-down lists allows for the selection of an option from a list, whereby the list can be opened and closed (see DIN EN ISO 9241-161: 8.11).

In the closed status, the current value (the selected option in the list) is displayed and to the right of it, a button (with arrow icon) for opening the list. In the open status, a selection list with all the options is also shown (possibly with a scrollbar). The current value is highlighted. The options can be grouped. The labeling of the groups cannot be selected.

Figure 49: Drop-down list
No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
716ContrastThe labeling of the options in the drop-down list must have a contrast of at least 4.5:1.

Note 1: This applies to the opened and closed status of the drop-down list and to the selected and unselected options.

Note 2: If the options are labeled with graphics rather than text, the contrast of the graphics with respect to the background and the content-bearing areas of the graphics with respect to each other must be at least 3:1.

MustEN 301 549: 9.1.4.3, 11.1.4.3, 9.1.4.11, 11.1.4.11
717ContrastIf the selected list entry only differs from the unselected list entry in the open state due to its color (e.g. foreground or background color), the colors must have a contrast ratio of at least 3:1.

Note: The selected list entry does not have to be color coded or marked with color only. It can be marked with a check box, for example. In this case, the contrast requirements for the color coding are eliminated as long as the check box has sufficient contrasts.

MustEN 301 549: 9.1.4.11, 11.1.4.11
718ContrastIf the drop-down list is only identifiable as such on the basis of its color design, the color must have a contrast ratio of at least 3:1 with respect to the neighboring colors.

Note 1: A drop-down list might be recognizable as an interactive element on the basis of its border or its background color, for example.

Note 2: The requirement does not apply if the drop-down list is clearly identifiable as such, because of its position or labeling, for example.

MustEN 301 549: 9.1.4.11, 11.1.4.11
719ContrastThe arrow icon for opening and closing the list must have a contrast ratio of at least 3:1 with respect to the neighboring color.MustEN 301 549: 9.1.4.11, 11.1.4.11
720LabelThe drop-down list must have a visible label (see Label).MustEN 301 549 9.3.3.2, 11.3.3.2
721Focus visibilityIf the drop-down list receives the keyboard focus, the focus indicator must be visible (see Focus indicator).MustEN 301 549: 9.2.4.7, 11.2.4.7
722Focus visibilityWhen navigating through the list entries, the current option must be displayed in the visible area and as focused.MustEN 301 549: 9.2.4.7, 11.2.4.7
723Options listThe options should be formulated in such a way that the information that serves the purpose of differentiation is at the beginning.ShouldDIN EN ISO 9241-143: 9.3.4
No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
724Use of the keyboardIt must be possible to access, operate and exit the drop-down list with the keyboard (see Use of the keyboard table, below).MustEN 301 549: 9.2.1.1, 11.2.1.1, 9.2.1.2, 11.2.1.2
725UpdatesWhen focusing and operating the drop-down list, no unexpected change of context may occur.

Note: This means that no loss of focus must occur during or after the operation of the drop-down list.

MustEN 301 549: 9.3.2.1, 11.3.2.1 und 9.3.2.2, 11.3.2.2
730Click areaThe click area of the list entries in the selection list should be at least 24 x 24 px.

Note: It should be possible to open the closed drop-down list by both clicking on the current value and clicking on the arrow (see Use of the pointing device).

ShouldWCAG 2.2.
ActionKeyClassification
Focusing of the drop-down listTABRequired
Exiting the drop-down listTABRequired
Opening the drop-down listDesktop:
  • ALT+DOWN ARROW

  • UP/DOWN ARROW

  • F4

  • Text input

Web:
  • ALT+DOWN ARROW

  • UP/DOWN ARROW

  • Text input

Required
Closing the drop-down listDesktop:
  • ALT+UP ARROW

  • ENTER

  • F4

  • ESC

  • TAB

Web:
  • ALT+UP ARROW

  • ENTER

  • ESC

  • TAB

Note: In Web applications, it is also recommended that the drop-down list can be opened with F4.

Required
Operation of the drop-down list (selection of the previous or following value)UP ARROW, DOWN ARROWRequired
Operation of the drop-down list (selection of the first and last value)POS1, ENDRequired with several list entries
Operation of the drop-down list (selection of a value before or after with a defined increment)PAGE UP, PAGE DOWN

Note: The increment should correspond to the amount of visible options.

Required with several list entries
Operation of the drop-down list (selection of a value which starts with a specific character string)Entry of one or more characters (within a short time)

Note: If two entries start with the same character string, the entries are navigated to one another in sequence.

Required with several list entries

Note: The operation of the drop-down list should be equally possible in both the open and closed states.

ActionKeyClassification
Opening the drop-down listLeft click on the drop-down list (value or arrow)Required
Closing the drop-down listLeft click on the drop-down list (value or arrow)Required
Closing the drop-down listLeft click on a value within the open listRequired
Closing the drop-down listLeft click outside the drop-down listRequired
Value selection within the open drop-down listLeft click on a valueRequired
No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
731RoleThe drop-down list role must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 9.1.4.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5
732ValueThe value of the drop-down list must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 9.1.4.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.7
733Desktop: Element hierarchyThe parent / child relationships of the elements within the list must be communicated to the Accessibility API.MustEN 301 549: 11.5.2.9
734StatusThe status of the drop-down list must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Element status).

Note: This also applies to the “open” or “closed” status.

MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5
735NameThe drop-down list must have a concise and expressive Accessible Name.MustEN 301 549: 9.2.4.6, 11.2.4.6, 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5, 11.5.2.8
736NameIf the drop-down list has a description, it must be communicated as an Accessible Description.MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5
737NameThe group label of the list entries must (if available) be communicated to the Accessibility API.MustEN 301 549: 9.1.3.1, 11.1.3.1
738OperationIt must be possible to access, operate and exit the drop-down list with assistive technology (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.12, 11.5.2.17
739UpdateUpdates concerning the Accessible Name, value or status of the drop-down list must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.15
740Desktop: PositionThe size and position of the drop-down list and – if open – the selection list and its list entries must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Focus indicator).MustEN 301 549: 11.5.2.5, 11.5.2.13

The drop-down list should be implemented with the HTML elements <select> and <option> (without the multiple and size attributes).

The list entries can be grouped with the <optgroup> element. The grouping should be avoided, however, as many screen readers do not output the group label (which is specified with the label attribute).

The initially selected list entry can be set with the selected attribute.

The label should be linked to the drop-down list with the <label for=ID> element. A drop-down list, a group of list entries and the individual list entries can be marked as disabled (disabled), but not read-only (readonly).

A drop-down list can be marked as a required field with required. In this case, however, the first list entry must be empty.

Further information: 4.10.7 The select element - HTML Standard (whatwg.org)

Please note: As the ARIA specification regarding combobox has changed fundamentally several times in recent years, it cannot be guaranteed that the ARIA drop-down list will be correctly output by all screen readers. The use of the HTML drop-down list is therefore recommended instead. Alternatively, the ARIA implementation should be thoroughly tested with differing browsers and screen readers.

Please note: Depending on the operating system, an HTML drop-down list is communicated to the Accessibility API differently. Under MacOS, a drop-down list is a menu button which opens a menu. If an ARIA drop-down list is used, no cross-platform solution is possible, as it would be necessary to use either the combobox role for Windows or the button role with aria-haspopup=menufor MacOS. The use of HTML drop-down lists is therefore recommended.

If the drop-down list is not implemented with the HTML element, it is also necessary to take account of the following:

Further information: combobox role - Accessible Rich Internet Applications (WAI-ARIA) 1.2 (w3.org) (External Link), Select-Only Combobox Example | APG | WAI | W3C

Slider

Online betrachten

Synonyms: Analog form element, range slider, range control

See also: Spin button, radio buttons, drop-down list, scrollbar, separator, progress bar

A slider is used to select a value from a continuous range of values (see DIN EN ISO 9241-161: 8.2). Sliders are mainly used for numerical values.

A slider consists of a bar that represents the entire range of values and a drag point which displays the selected value and through which the value is changed. Sliders can also feature an unlabeled or labeled scale of values on the bar. A slider can be aligned vertically or horizontally.

Figure 50: Slider

Presentation

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
741ContrastThe bars of the slider must have a contrast ratio of at least 3:1 with respect to the background.MustEN 301 549: 9.1.4.11, 11.1.4.11
742ContrastThe drag point of the slider must have a contrast ratio of at least 3:1 with respect to the background.MustEN 301 549: 9.1.4.11, 11.1.4.11
743ContrastIf the drag point is only located within the bar, each must have a contrast ratio of at least 3:1 with respect to each other.

Note: The contrast ratio of the drag point and the bar can also be maintained with a corresponding border around the drag point.

MustEN 301 549: 9.1.4.11, 11.1.4.11
744ContrastAll the text elements of the slider (e.g. display of current and possible values) must have a contrast ratio of at least 4.5:1.MustEN 301 549: 9.1.4.3, 11.1.4.3
745LabelThe slider must have a visible label (see Label).

Note: If the purpose of the slider is clear from the visual context, the labeling can be omitted. This applies to sliders that are used for time control of videos.

MustEN 301 549 9.3.3.2, 11.3.3.2
746Focus visibilityIf the slider receives the keyboard focus, the focus indicator must be visible (see Focus indicator).MustEN 301 549: 9.2.4.7, 11.2.4.7
747ValueThe current value of the slider should be visually perceptible in text form.ShouldDIN EN ISO 9241-161: 8.2.2

Operation

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
748Use of the keyboardIt must be possible to access, operate and exit the slider with the keyboard (see Use of the keyboard table, below).MustEN 301 549: 9.2.1.1, 11.2.1.1, 9.2.1.2, 11.2.1.2
749Use of the pointing deviceThe use of the pointing device to operate the slider must not be complex, i.e. if the value change of the slider is only possible by dragging the drag point, the value change must also be possible if the pointing device is no longer on the bar.

Note 1: Complex use of the pointing device means

  • multipoint operation (e.g. swiping with several fingers),

  • path-based operation (where the start and end points of the use of the pointing device are not just relevant, but at least one intermediate point is).

Note 2: The slider can be combined with an input field or spin button to provide an alternative method of value selection which does not require the complex use of the pointing device. In this case, the current value of both form elements must be synchronized automatically.

MustEN 301 549: 9.2.5.1, 11.2.5.1
750Use of the pointing deviceIt should also be possible to operate the slider without the dragging use of the pointing device.

Note: This can be done enabling the value selection by clicking on the bar, for example.

ShouldWCAG 2.2
751UpdatesWhen focusing and operating the slider, no unexpected change of context may occur.MustEN 301 549: 9.3.2.1, 11.3.2.1, 9.3.2.2, 11.3.2.2
752Click areaThe click area of the drag point of the slider should be at least 24 x 24 px (see Use of the pointing device).ShouldWCAG 2.2
753Click areaSliders should only be used when it is not necessary to enter an exact value. Alternatively, the slider should be designed so that the individual selectable values have a spacing of at least 24 px.ShouldWCAG 2.2

Use of the keyboard: slider

ActionKeyClassification
Focusing of the sliderTABRequired
Exiting the sliderTABRequired
Operation of the slider (selection of the previous or following value)DOWN/LEFT ARROW, UP/RIGHT ARROW

Note: Two arrow keys should function in each direction regardless of the orientation, as the orientation is often not correctly perceptible with AT.

Required
Operation of the slider (selection of the first and last value)POS1, ENDRequired
Operation of the slider (selection of a value before or after with a defined increment)PAGE UP, PAGE DOWN

Note: The increment depends on the amount of possible values. An increment of 10 for instance, would make sense with 100 values.

Recommended

Use of the pointing device: slider

ActionKeyClassification
Value changeDragging of the drag point (drag and drop)Required
Value changeLeft click on an area of the barRecommended

Programming/interfaces

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
754RoleThe role of the slider must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5
755ValueThe value of the slider must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.7
756Desktop: Value rangeThe minimum and maximum value of the slider must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 11.5.2.7
757StatusThe status of the slider must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Element status).MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5
758OrientationThe orientation of the slider (vertical or horizontal) must be communicated to the Accessibility API.MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2
759NameThe slider must have a concise and expressive Accessible Name.MustEN 301 549: EN 301 549: 9.2.4.6, 11.2.4.6, 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5, 11.5.2.8
760NameIf the slider has a description, it must be communicated as an Accessible Description.MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5
761OperationIt must be possible to access, operate and exit the slider with assistive technology (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.12, 11.5.2.17
762UpdateUpdates concerning the Accessible Name, value or status of the slider must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.15
763Desktop: PositionThe size and position of the slider and the drag point must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Focus indicator).MustEN 301 549: 11.5.2.5, 11.5.2.13

Practical tip: sliders in Web applications

Screen reader output

HTML

The slider should be implemented with the HTML element <input type=range>. The initial value can be set with the value attribute.

The minimum and maximum values and increment are set with the min, max and step attributes. It should be noted that these values are imperceptible with many forms of assistive technology.

The label should be linked to the slider with the <label for=ID> element.

A slider can be marked as disabled (disabled), but not read-only (readonly) or as a required field (required).

It is not possible to set the orientation of the slider. Most browsers display the slider horizontally.

Further information: 4.10.5.1.13 Range state (type=range) - HTML Standard (whatwg.org)

ARIA

Please note: On mobile devices, an ARIA slider may not be operated with assistive technology, because no gesture commands for the operation of non-native sliders have been implemented.

If the slider is not implemented with the HTML element, it is also necessary to take account of the following:

The ARIA slider differs from the HTML slider in the following ways:

Further information: slider role - Accessible Rich Internet Applications (WAI-ARIA) 1.2 (w3.org) (External Link), Slider Pattern | APG | WAI | W3C

Scrollbars

Online betrachten

Synonyms: Scrollbar

See also: Slider, pagination, carousel, control point

A scrollbar is for scrolling through the entire page, part of a page or parts of an element (such as list entries in a drop-down list) in the visible area. The scrollbar also serves the visualization of the current position and the overall size of the page, parts of the page or elements (see DIN EN ISO 9241-161: 8.35).

A scrollbar consists of a moving bar and the scroll box. The moving bar represents the total length or width of the scrollable area. The scroll box shows the location and size of the visible section and also allows the visible section to be moved.

At the start and end of the moving bar there is generally a button with an arrow icon for incremental scrolling.

Vertical scrollbars are located on the right-hand border of the scrollable area. Horizontal scrollbars are located on the lower border of the scrollable area.

Figure 51: Vertical and horizontal scrollbar

Presentation

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
764ContrastThe icons of the buttons on the border of the scrollbar must have a contrast ratio of at least 3:1 with respect to the background.MustEN 301 549: 9.1.4.11, 11.1.4.11
765ContrastThe scroll box must have a contrast ratio of at least 3:1 with respect to the moving bar.

Note: The contrast ratio of the scroll box and moving bar can also be maintained with a corresponding border around the moving bar.

MustEN 301 549: 9.1.4.11, 11.1.4.11
766ContrastIf the moving bar is only identifiable as such on the basis of its color design, the color must have a contrast ratio of at least 3:1 with respect to the neighboring colors.

Note 1: A moving bar might be recognizable as an interactive element on the basis of its border or its background color, for example.

Note 2: This requirement does not apply if the entire scrollbar is clearly recognizable as such, because of its position in combination with the buttons at the start and end and the scroll box, for example.

MustEN 301 549: 9.1.4.11, 11.1.4.11
767AmountThe page contents must wrap in such a way that they only need to be scrolled vertically or horizontally for a display size up to a minimum of 320 x 256 px. This does not apply to required two-dimensional content (see Zoom).MustEN 301 549 9.1.4.10, 11.1.4.10

Operation

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
768Use of the keyboardIt must be possible to scroll in the areas with the keyboard (see Use of the keyboard table, below).

Note: The scrollbars should not receive keyboard focus, but the scrollable areas and/or elements within the scrollable areas.

MustEN 301 549: 9.2.1.1, 11.2.1.1, 9.2.1.2, 11.2.1.2
769Use of the pointing deviceThe use of the pointing device for the scrollbar may not be complex.

Please note: Complex use of the pointing device means

  • multipoint operation (e.g. swiping with several fingers),

  • path-based operation (where the start and end points of the use of the pointing device are not just relevant, but at least one intermediate point is).

MustEN 301 549: 9.2.5.1, 11.2.5.1
770Use of the keyboardIt should also be possible to operate the scrollbar without the dragging use of the pointing device.

Note: This can be done enabling the scrolling by clicking on the moving bar or the buttons, for example.

ShouldWCAG 2.2
771UpdatesWhen scrolling, no unexpected change of context should occur.MustWCAG 2.1: 3.2.5 (AAA)
772AnimationsWhen scrolling, there should not be any other visual animation apart from the moving of the visible area.ShouldWCAG 2.1: 2.3.3 (AAA)
773Click areaThe scrollbars should be at least 24 px wide.ShouldWCAG 2.2
774Click areaThe click area of the buttons and scroll box of the scrollbar should be at least 24 x 24 px.ShouldWCAG 2.2

Use of the keyboard: scrollbar

ActionKeyClassification
Focusing of the scrollable area or elements within the scrollable areaTAB

Note 1: If the scrollable area does not contain any elements that allow for scrolling with the arrow keys, then the area itself must receive the focus.

Note 2: Elements that are themselves controlled by the arrow keys (such as input fields, selection lists and radio buttons) do not allow for the scrolling of the area in which they are located.

Required
Exiting the scrollable areaTABRequired
Scrolling of a focused item to the visible areaWhen receiving the keyboard focusRequired
Vertical scrollingUP/DOWN ARROWRequired
Horizontal scrollingRIGHT/LEFT ARROWRequired
Vertical scrolling (quick navigation)PAGE UP/PAGE DOWN
(CTRL +) POS1/END
Recommended

Use of the pointing device: scrollbar

ActionKeyClassification
Incremental scrollingLeft click on the buttons on the edge of the scrollbarRequired
Scrolling (quick navigation)Left click on the moving bar outside the scroll boxRequired
Scrolling to a specific positionDragging of the scroll box (drag and drop)Required

Note: The scrolling capabilities of the pointing devices should also be supported (e.g., mouse scroll wheel, gesture commands for scrolling on the touch-pad).

Programming/interfaces

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
775RoleThe role of the scrollbar must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5
776RoleIf the scrollable area receives the keyboard focus and does not have the role of control element, the scrollable area role must be communicated to the Accessibility API.

Note: If the technology used does not know the role of the scrollable area, reference should be made in the Accessible Description that the element for scrolling receives the focus.

MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5
777ValueThe values of the scrollbar must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Accessibility API).

Note: The scrollbar has the following values:

  • Size of scroll box relative to the size of the moving bar (represents the size of the visible section)

  • Position of scroll box within the moving bar.

MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.7
778Desktop: Value rangeThe minimum and maximum value of the scrollbar must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 11.5.2.7
779StatusThe status of the scrollbar must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Element status).MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5
780OrientationThe orientation of the scrollbar (vertical or horizontal) must be communicated to the Accessibility API.MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2
781Desktop: PositionThe new position of the focused element must be communicated to the Accessibility API after the scrolling of the area (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 11.5.2.5, 11.5.2.13, 11.5.2.15

Radio buttons

Online betrachten

Synonyms: Option fields, selection button, radio button group

See also: Selection lists, drop-down lists, check boxes

Radio buttons are used for selecting mutually exclusive options (see DIN EN ISO 9241-161: 8.33).

A radio button consists of an indicator which indicates whether the option is selected or not selected. A radio button group consists of several radio buttons with their labels and a group label. Radio buttons must be grouped.

Figure 52: Radio buttons in a group

Presentation

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
782ContrastThe border of the radio button must have a contrast ratio of at least 3:1 with respect to the background.MustEN 301 549: 9.1.4.11, 11.1.4.11
783ContrastThe symbol which relays the status (circle) must have a contrast ratio of at least 3:1 with respect to the neighboring color.MustEN 301 549: 9.1.4.11, 11.1.4.11
784LabelThe radio buttons must have a visible label (see Label).MustEN 301 549 9.3.3.2, 11.3.3.2
785LabelThe label of the radio button should be located to the right of the radio button.ShouldDIN EN ISO 9241-125: 5.1.15
786LabelThe label of the group should be unambiguous and understandable within the context (see Group).ShouldDIN EN ISO 9241-171: 8.1.2, 8.1.3
787Focus visibilityIf the radio button receives the keyboard focus, the focus indicator must be visible (see Focus indicator).MustEN 301 549: 9.2.4.7, 11.2.4.7

Operation

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
788Use of the keyboardIt must be possible to access, operate and exit the radio buttons with the keyboard (see Use of the keyboard table, below).MustEN 301 549: 9.2.1.1, 11.2.1.1, 9.2.1.2, 11.2.1.25
789UpdatesWhen focusing and operating the radio buttons, no unexpected change of context may occur.

Note: This means that no loss of focus must occur during or after the operation of the radio buttons.

MustEN 301 549: 9.3.2.1, 11.3.2.1, 9.3.2.2, 11.3.2.2
790Click areaThe click area of the radio buttons should be at least 24 x 24 px (see Use of the pointing device).

Note: It should be possible to operate the radio buttons by both clicking on the radio button and clicking on the respective label (see Use of the pointing device).

ShouldWCAG 2.2

Use of the keyboard: radio buttons

ActionKeyClassification
Focusing of the radio button groupTAB

Note: The selected radio button receives the focus. If no radio button is selected, the first radio button receives the focus.

Required
Exiting the radio button groupTABRequired
Selecting a radio buttonSPACERequired
Operation of the radio button group (selecting a radio button)UP/DOWN RIGHT/LEFT ARROW

Note: In this context, the navigation must be limited to the radio button group.

Required
Navigation within the radio button group (without changing the selection)CTRL + UP/DOWN RIGHT/LEFT ARROWRecommended

Use of the pointing device: radio buttons

ActionKeyClassification
Selecting a radio buttonLeft clickRequired

Programming/interfaces

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
791RoleThe radio button role must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5
792ValueThe value of the radio button (selected, not selected) must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.7
793Desktop: Element hierarchyThe parent / child relationships of the elements within the radio button group must be communicated to the Accessibility API.MustEN 301 549: 11.5.2.9
794StatusThe status of the radio button must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Element status).MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5
795NameThe radio buttons must have a concise and expressive Accessible Name.MustEN 301 549: 9.2.4.6, 11.2.4.6, 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5, 11.5.2.8
796NameIf the radio buttons have a description, it must be communicated as an Accessible Description.MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5
797NameIf the radio button group has a label, this must be communicated to the Accessibility API as the Accessible Name of the group (see Group).MustEN 301 549: 9.1.3.1, 11.1.3.1
798OperationIt must be possible to access, operate and exit the radio button group with assistive technology (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.12, 11.5.2.17
799UpdateUpdates concerning the Accessible Name, value or status of the radio buttons and radio button group must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: EN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.15
800Desktop: PositionThe size and position of the radio button must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Focus indicator).MustEN 301 549: 11.5.2.5, 11.5.2.13

Practical tip: radio buttons in Web applications

Screen reader output

HTML

The radio button group should be marked with the HTML element <fieldset> and labeled with the <legend> element.

The radio buttons should be implemented with the HTML element <input type=radio> . Radio buttons that belong to the same group must have the same value in the name attribute and may not be located in different <form> elements.

The initially selected status is set with the checked attribute. An initial radio button should be selected in each radio button group, as keyboard users automatically make a selection when navigating through the radio buttons which cannot be undone. The radio button should be initially selected which is either most likely to be selected or which contains a neutral option (e.g. “not applicable”).

The label should be linked to the respective radio button using the <label for=ID> element in order to expand the click area of the radio button by its label.

A radio button and the radio button group can be marked as disabled (disabled), but not as read-only (readonly).

If a radio button is marked as a required field with required, this applies to the entire radio button group, i.e. if any radio button was selected, this is sufficient for submitting the form. To ensure that the required field label is perceptible with the assistive technology on all radio buttons, using the required attribute on all radio buttons, or alternatively, adding a required text field reference (e.g. an asterisk) in the group label (<legend>) is recommended. If a radio button is initially preselected with the checked attribute, no required field label is required.

Error messages should not be associated with each individual radio button, but with the group.

Further information: 4.10.5.1.16 Radio Button state (type=radio) - HTML Standard (whatwg.org)

ARIA

If the radio button group is not implemented with the HTML element, it is also necessary to take account of the following:

Further information: radio role - Accessible Rich Internet Applications (WAI-ARIA) 1.2 (w3.org) (External Link), radiogroup role - Accessible Rich Internet Applications (WAI-ARIA) 1.2 (w3.org) (External Link), Radio Group Pattern | APG | WAI | W3C, Checkbox Pattern | APG | WAI | W3C

Check box

Online betrachten

Synonyms: Control box, control field, selection box

See also: Toggle switch, switch, radio buttons, selection list with multiple selection

A check box serves the selection of the options “selected” or “not selected” (see DIN EN ISO 9241-161: 8.4). A check box can also relay the status of a subordinate check box group (“all selected”, “none selected” or “some selected”).

A check box consists of a square frame and an indicator (check mark) which indicates whether the check box has been selected, has not been selected, or whether some of the subordinate group have been selected.

Figure 53: Check boxes in a group

Presentation

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
801ContrastThe border of the check box must have a contrast ratio of at least 3:1 with respect to the background.MustEN 301 549: 9.1.4.11, 11.1.4.11
802ContrastThe symbol which relays the “selected” and “some selected” states (check mark) must have a contrast ratio of at least 3:1 with respect to the neighboring color.MustEN 301 549: 9.1.4.11, 11.1.4.11
803LabelThe check box must have a visible label (see Label).MustEN 301 549 9.3.3.2, 11.3.3.2
804LabelThe label of the check box should be on the right-hand side of the check box.ShouldDIN EN ISO 9241-125: 5.1.15
805Focus visibilityIf the check box receives the keyboard focus, the focus indicator must be visible (see Focus indicator).MustEN 301 549: 9.2.4.7, 11.2.4.7

Operation

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
806Use of the keyboardIt must be possible to access, operate and exit the check box with the keyboard (see Use of the keyboard table).MustEN 301 549: 9.2.1.1, 9.2.1.2, 11.2.1.1, 11.2.1.2
807UpdatesWhen focusing and operating the check box, no unexpected change of context may occur.

Note: This means that no loss of focus must occur during or after the operation of the check box.

MustEN 301 549: 9.3.2.1, 9.3.2.2, 11.3.2.1, 11.3.2.2
808Click areaThe click area of the check box should be at least 24 x 24 px (see Use of the pointing device).

Note: It should be possible to operate the check box by both clicking on the check box and clicking on the label (see Use of the pointing device).

ShouldWCAG 2.2

Use of the keyboard: check box

ActionKeyClassification
Focusing of the check boxTABRequired
Exiting the check boxTABRequired
Operation of the check box (value change)SPACERequired
Desktop: Navigating within a check box groupLEFT/UP ARROW,
RIGHT/DOWN ARROW

Note: Navigation does not change the value.

Recommended

Use of the pointing device: check box

ActionKeyClassification
Operation of the check box (value change)Left clickRequired

Programming/interfaces

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
809RoleThe check box role must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2,11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5
810ValueThe value of the check box (selected, partially selected, not selected) must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.7
811StatusThe status of the check box must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Element status).MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5
812NameThe check box must have a concise and expressive Accessible Name.MustEN 301 549: 9.2.4.6, 11.2.4.6, 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5, 11.5.2.8
813NameIf the check box has a description, it must be communicated as an Accessible Description.MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5
814OperationIt must be possible to access, operate and exit the check box with assistive technology (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.12, 11.5.2.17
815UpdateUpdates concerning the name, value or status of the check box must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.15
816Desktop: PositionThe size and position of the check box must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Focus indicator).MustEN 301 549: 11.5.2.5, 11.5.2.13

Practical tip: check box in Web applications

Screen reader output

HTML

The check box should be implemented with the HTML element <input type=checkbox>.

The initially selected status is set with the checked attribute. The “some selected” state can only be set using JavaScript with the indeterminate=true characteristic.

The labeling of the check box should be linked to the check box using the <label for=ID> element in order to expand the click area of the check box by its label.

A check box can be marked as disabled (disabled), but not as read-only (readonly).

A check box can be marked as a required field with required. This is only useful in cases where the check box has to be submitted in the “selected” (checked) status. However, if at least one check box in a group of check boxes must be selected, the check box should not be marked with required, but the required field label should be implemented in the group. As the group cannot be marked with required, the required field label should be in text form (e.g. an asterisk within the group label).

Check boxes that belong together should be positioned within a labeled Form field group. The <fieldset> element is used for the group and the <legend> element is used for the group label.

Error messages that do not relate to a single check box but to the check box group should not be linked to each individual check box but to the group.

Further information: 4.10.5.1.15 Checkbox state (type=checkbox) - HTML Standard (whatwg.org)

ARIA

If the check box is not implemented with the HTML element, it is also necessary to take account of the following:

Further information: checkbox role - Accessible Rich Internet Applications (WAI-ARIA) 1.2 (w3.org) (External Link), Checkbox Pattern | APG | WAI | W3C

Composite control elements

Online betrachten

Table of contents

Pagination

Online betrachten

Synonyms: Page navigation

See also: Scrollbars

Pagination is used to navigate through pages or sequential elements (for example, with tables).

The requirements for the individual control elements are described for the respective control element.

Figure 54: Pagination

Presentation

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
817ContrastThe highlighting for the current page must have a contrast ratio of at least 3:1 with respect to the background and the other pages.MustEN 301 549: 9.1.4.11, 11.1.4.11

Operation

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
818Use of the keyboardIt must be possible to access, operate and exit the page navigation with the keyboard (see Use of the keyboard table, below).MustEN 301 549: 9.2.1.1, 11.2.1.1, 9.2.1.2, 11.2.1.2
819UpdatesWhen focusing and using the control elements for the page navigation, no unexpected change of context may occur.MustEN 301 549: 9.3.2.1, 11.3.2.1
819UpdatesWhen operating the control elements for the pagination, no loss of focus may occur.

Note: During the operation, the focus must remain on the control elements of the pagination or be placed at the start of the area controlled by the pagination.

MustEN 301 549: 9.2.4.3, 11.2.4.3
820Click areaThe click area of the control elements for the page navigation should be at least 24 x 24 px (see Use of the pointing device).ShouldWCAG 2.2

Use of the keyboard: page navigation

ActionKeyClassification
Focusing of the first element of the page navigationTABRequired
Exiting the page navigationTABRequired
Navigating within the page navigationTAB or ARROW buttons (depending on the used elements)Required
Operating interactive elements in the page navigationCorresponding to the respective elementRequired
Navigating to the previous or next page (if the focus is in the element which is controlled by the page navigation)PAGE UP, PAGE DOWN
ARROW keys
Recommended
Navigating to the first or last page (if the focus is in the element which is controlled by the page navigation)POS 1, ENDRecommended

Programming/interfaces

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
821NameEach control element of the pagination must have a concise and expressive Accessible Name.

Note 1: If the navigation buttons are visually labeled with “1”, “2”, “3” or “<” and “>”, the Accessible Name should be called

  • either “page 1”, “page 2”, “page 3” and/or “previous page” and “next page”, or

  • “1”, “2”, “3” and/or “back” and “forward”, and the buttons should be located in a group which is labeled with “pagination”, for example.

Note 2: If the context of the pagination is visually clear but programmatically unclear (because the pagination might refer to a page or table on the page, for example), this context should be communicated the Accessibility API (with the Accessible Name, the Accessible Description, or the labeling of a group, for example).

MustEN 301 549: 9.2.4.6, 11.2.4.6, 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5, 11.5.2.8
822Desktop: Element hierarchyThe parent / child relationships of the elements within the pagination must be communicated to the Accessibility API.MustEN 301 549: 11.5.2.9
823StatusThe status of the control elements for the pagination must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Element status).

Note: In particular, this applies to the “current page” status and the “disabled” status (e.g. to the buttons for the first and previous page, if page 1 is the current page).

MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5

Composite form fields

Online betrachten

Composite form fields consist of two or more form fields that have a visual label.

The requirements for the individual form fields are described for the respective form field type. Here, only the additional requirements are described which result from the fact that a label refers to several fields.

Figure 55: Compoiste input fields

Presentation

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
824LabelEach form field should have a tooltip that contains the specific label.

Note: In the address form, this would be „zip code“ or „location“. In the case of form fields for the time period, this is, for example, „start“ and „end“.

ShouldDIN EN ISO 9241-143: 9.6.11

Programming/interfaces

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
825NameEach form field must have a concise and expressive Accessible Name.

Note: In the address form, this would be „zip code“ or „location“. In the case of form fields for the time period, this is, for example, „period: start“ and „period: end“ .

MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5, 11.5.2.8
826NameThe visible label must match with or be contained in the Accessible Name (see Practical tip: composite form fields).MustEN 301 549: 9.2.5.3, 11.2.5.3

Practical tip: composite form fields

With composite form fields, the following problems may arise:

For these reasons, we recommend that the use of composite form fields is avoided and each field is assigned a label visually and programmatically.

Otherwise, and at the least, the following information should be taken into account:

Figure 56: Complex form field (Outlook: New Items > Appointment > Make Recurring)

Accordion

Online betrachten

See also: Button, tabs, carousel

An accordion combines several areas which are arranged one beneath the other and which can be shown and hidden using buttons. In this respect, the labeling of the areas is visible at all times (see DIN EN ISO 9241-161: 8.1). The label usually has a visual indicator which refers to the status of the area (shown or hidden). For an accordion, different implementation variants are possible with respect to the minimum or maximum number of open areas, e.g.

Figure: Accordion completely closed and accordion with an open area

Presentation

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
827ContrastThe labeling of the areas must have a contrast of at least 4.5:1.MustEN 301 549: 9.1.4.3, 11.1.4.3
828ContrastThe visual indicator in the respective labeling of an accordion area which refers to the status of the area (open or closed) must have a contrast ratio of at least 3:1 with respect to the background.MustEN 301 549: 11.1.4.1; EN 301 549: 11.1.4.11
829ContrastIf the areas and the area labels are only identifiable as such on the basis of their color design, these colors must have a contrast ratio of at least 3:1 with respect to the neighboring colors.

Note 1: The areas and area labels can be identifiable as such, for example, due to their borders or background colors.

Note 2: The requirement does not apply if the areas and area labels are clearly identifiable as such, due to their position and spacing, for example.

ShouldEN 301 549: 9.1.4.11, 11.1.4.11
830LabelThe label of the areas must be expressive (see Label).MustEN 301 549 9.2.4.6, 11.2.4.6
831Focus visibilityIf the area label receives the keyboard focus, the focus indicator must be visible (see Focus indicator).MustEN 301 549: 9.2.4.7, 11.2.4.7

Operation

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
832Use of the keyboardIt must be possible to access, operate and exit the accordion with the keyboard (see Use of the keyboard table, below).MustEN 301 549: 9.2.1.1, 11.2.1.1, 9.2.1.2, 11.2.1.2
833Use of the keyboardThe hidden areas and their contents must not receive keyboard focus.MustEN 301 549: 9.1.3.1, 11.1.3.1
834UpdatesWhen focusing and operating the accordion, no unexpected change of context may occure.MustEN 301 549: 9.3.2.1, 11.3.2.1
835UpdatesWhen operating the buttons for showing and hiding the areas, no loss of focus loss may occur.

Note: The focus must remain on the button or be placed at the beginning of the shown area.

MustEN 301 549: 9.2.4.3, 11.2.4.3
836Focus orderThe focus order in the accordion must correspond to the visual presentation, i.e. the opened areas receive the keyboard focus immediately after the area label.MustEN 301 549: 9.2.4.3, 11.2.4.3
837Click areaThe click area of the area labels should be at least 24 x 24 px (see Use of the pointing device).ShouldWCAG 2.2

Use of the keyboard: accordion

ActionKeyClassification
Focusing of the area labelsTABRequired
Exiting the area labelsTAB

Note: If the corresponding area is closed, the next area label is focused using the TAB key. Otherwise, the focus is placed in the area.

Required
Operation of the area labels (opening
and/or closing the area)ENTER, SPACERequired
Navigating between the area labelsUP/DOWN ARROWRecommended
Quick navigation between the area labelsPOS1, ENDRecommended

Use of the pointing device: accordion

ActionKeyClassification
Operation of the area labels (opening and/or closing the area)Left clickRequired

Programming/interfaces

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
838RoleFor the area labeling, the button role must be communicated to the Accessibility API (siehe Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5
839Desktop: Element hierarchieThe parent / child relationships of the elements within the accordion must be communicated to the Accessibility API.MustEN 301 549: 11.5.2.9
840StatusThe status of the area labels must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Element status).

Note: This also applies to the „open“ or „closed“ status.

MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5
841NameThe buttons with the area labels must have a concise and expressive Accessible Name.MustEN 301 549: 9.2.4.6, 11.2.4.6, 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5
842NameIf the buttons with the area labels have a description, it must be communicated as an Accessible Description.MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5
843OperationIt must be possible to access, operate and exit the buttons with the area labels with assistive technology (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.12, 11.5.2.17
844UpdateUpdates concerning the Accessible Name, value or status of the area labels must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.15
845Desktop: PositionThe size and position of the area labels and areas must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 11.5.2.5, 11.5.2.13

Practical tip: accordion in Web applications

Screen reader output for the accordion buttons for showing and hiding the areas

Note: When using the <details>-element without a label, the beginning and end of the page area are not perceptible with assistive technology. If the <details>-element is explicitly labeled (by )aria-label or aria-labelledby) the area is output as „group“ (JAWS) or „grouping“ (NVDA). Die Windows Narrator does not output labeled groups either.

HTML

There is no element for accordions in HTML. Instead, several areas can be used which are shown and hidden using buttons. The areas are marked with <details> and the buttons with <summary>. The <summary> element is the first child element within <details>. The labels of the buttons are derived from the text content in the <summary> element. The initial state of the area (opened or closed) is set with the open attribute.

To make the coherence of the areas and buttons perceptible with assistive technology, they can be nested in a labeled group.

According to the HTML specification, the <summary> element may contain links, headings, input fields and many other elements – it is important to remember, however, that all the elements which are located within <summary> are imperceptible and cannot be operated with the screen reader, as the <summary> element is communicated to the Accessibility API as a button. Therefore, the <summary> element should only contain a concise and expressive label in text form.

Further information: 4.11.1 The details element - HTML Standard (whatwg.org) (External Link), 4.11.2 The summary element - HTML Standard (whatwg.org) (External Link)

ARIA

There is no role for accordions in ARIA. Instead, several areas can be used which are shown and hidden using Button. In this respect, the following should be taken into account:

Alternatively, a tab group can be used instead of an accordion.

Further information: aria-expanded state - Accessible Rich Internet Applications (WAI-ARIA) 1.2 (w3.org) (External Link), Accordion Pattern (Sections With Show/Hide Functionality) | APG | WAI | W3C

Date picker

Online betrachten

Synonyms: Calendar date picker, calendar, calendar element, calendar control, time selector, time picker, clock, date and time selector, date-time picker

See also: Combined input field, color picker

Note: All the following statements apply equally to the time picker or to control elements for the selection of weeks, months or years.

A date picker is used for the supported entry of a date (see DIN EN ISO 9241-161: 8.9 and 8.46).

Date pickers can be implemented in different ways, e.g. as

The dialog for selecting a date can contain the following elements:

Examples:

Figure: Date picker

Presentation

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
846ContrastThe visual highlighting of the days and time periods must have a contrast ratio of at least 3:1 between each other.

Note: If this is not possible, an additional visual method must be used for the differentiation.

MustEN 301 549: 11.1.4.1
847DescriptionA legend or tooltip should explain the meaning of visual highlighting, unless it is self-explanatory.

Note: The visual highlighting of weekends and public holidays is self-explanatory, for example.

ShouldDIN EN ISO 9241-143: 9.6.11

Operation

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
848Use of the keyboardIt must be possible to access, operate and exit the date picker and the elements that it contains with the keyboard (see Use of the keyboard table, below).MustEN 301 549: 9.2.1.1, 11.2.1.1, 9.2.1.2, 11.2.1.2
849UpdatesWhen focusing and operating the date picker, no unexpected change of context may occure .MustEN 301 549: 9.3.2.1, 11.3.2.1, 9.3.2.2, 11.3.2.2
850Error messageAn entered date may not be corrected automatically without an error message which must be provided in text form.

Note: This does not include changes to the input, unless these change the date (such as the automatic insertion of leading zeros)

MustEN 301 549: 9.3.3.1, 11.3.3.1
851focus orderThe focus order in the date picker should correspond to the visual presentation.ShouldDIN EN ISO 9241-171: 9.3.18
852Focus orderIf the date picker outside a dialog contains several control elements that receive the focus with TAB, it should be possible to skip the date picker with the keyboard (see navigtion sequence)ShouldDIN EN ISO 9241-171: 9.3.17
853Click areaThe click area of the control elements for the date picker should be at least 24 x 24 px (see Use of the pointing device).ShouldWCAG 2.2

Use of the keyboard: date picker

ActionKeyClassification
Focusing of the date pickerTABRequired
Exiting the date pickerTAB

Note: There can be several control elements within the date picker that have been previously focused with TAB.

Required
Navigating within the date pickerTAB or LEFT/RIGHT/UP/DOWN ARROW (depending on the used control element)Required
Quick navigation within the selection elements for a day, a month or a yearPOS1, END, PAGE UP/DOWNRecommended
Activation of the control elements in the date pickerENTER or SPACE (depending on the used control element)Required

Use of the pointing device: date picker

ActionKeyClassification
Activation of the control elements in the date pickerleft clickRequired

Programming/interfaces

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
854RoleThe role of the date picker and its control elements must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5
854Desktop: Element hierarchyThe parent / child relationships of the elements within the date picker must be communicated to the Accessibility API.MustEN 301 549: 11.5.2.9
855StatusThe status of the date picker and its control elements must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Element status).

Note 1: This refers, for example, to the „open“ or „closed“ status with respect to the dialog, and to the „selected“ status with respect to the selected date within one of the selection elements.

Note 2: Insofar as the purpose of the visual highlighting (such as public holiday, holiday) cannot be communicated as the status, this information should be communicated as part of the description.

MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5
856NameThe date picker and its control elements must have a concise and expressive Accessible Name.MustEN 301 549: 9.2.4.6, 11.2.4.6, 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5, 11.5.2.8
857NameIf the date picker or its control elements have a description, it must be communicated as an Accessible Description.MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5
858OperationIt must be possible to access, operate and exit the date picker and its control elements with assistive technology (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.12, 11.5.2.17
859UpdateUpdates concerning the Accessible Name or status of the date picker and its control elements must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.15
860PositionThe size and position of the date picker and its control elements must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 11.5.2.5, 11.5.2.15

Color picker

Online betrachten

Synonyms: Color picker

See also: Slider, Date picker The color picker serves the selection of a color (see DIN EN ISO 9241-161: 8.6). Color pickers can be implemented in different ways, e.g. as

The requirements for the individual control elements within the color picker are described for the respective control element. Only the additional requirements for the whole of the element are described here.

Figure: Color picker

Presentation

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
861Color codingThe color picker must contain at least one option for selecting a color by its color name, color code (such as HEX), or values of the color channels (such as RGB).MustEN 301 549: 9.1.4.1, 11.1.4.1
862Color codingIf the selectable values or the current value are visually displayed in color, the elements should have a tooltip with the color name or the color value in text form.

Note: The output of the color name should preferably be used.

ShouldDIN EN ISO 9241-143: 9.6.11

Operation

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
863Use of the keyboardIt must be possible to access, operate and exit the color picker and the elements that it contains with the keyboard (see Use of the keyboard table, below).MustEN 301 549: 9.2.1.1, 11.2.1.1, 9.2.1.2, 11.2.1.2
864UpdateWhen focusing and operating the color picker, no unexpected change of context may occure.MustEN 301 549: 9.3.2.1, 11.3.2.1 und 9.3.2.2, 11.3.2.2
865Focus orderThe focus order in the color picker should correspond to the visual presentation.ShouldDIN EN ISO 9241-171: 9.3.18
866Focus orderIf the color picker outside a dialog contains several control elements that receive the focus with TAB, it should be possible to skip the color picker with the keyboard (see navigation sequence)ShouldDIN EN ISO 9241-171: 9.3.17
867Click areaThe click area of the control elements for the color picker should be at least 24 x 24 px (see use of the pointing device).ShouldWCAG 2.2

Use of the keyboard: color picker

ActionKeyClassification
Focusing of the color pickerTABRequired
Exiting the color pickerTAB

Note: There can be several control elements within the color picker that have been previously focused with TAB.

Required
Navigating within the color pickerTAB or LEFT/RIGHT/UP/DOWN ARROW (depending on the used control element)Required
Activation of the control elements in the color pickerENTER or SPACE (depending on the used control element)Required

Use of the pointing device: color picker

ActionKeyClassification
Activation of the control elements in the color pickerleft clickRequired

Programming/interfaces

No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
868RoleThe role of the color picker and its control elements must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5
869Desktop: Element hierarchyThe parent / child relationships of the elements within the color picker must be communicated to the Accessibility API.MustEN 301 549: 11.5.2.9
870Status, valueThe value and status of the color picker and its control elements must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Element status).

Note 1: Status refers, for example, to the „open“ or „closed“ status with respect to the dialog, and to the „selected“ status with respect to the selected color within one of the selection elements.

Note 2: Value refers, for example, to the selected color or the value of a color channel. Color names are to be preferred over color values.

MustEN 301 549: 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5
871NameThe color picker and its control elements must have a concise and expressive Accessible Name.MustEN 301 549: 9.2.4.6, 11.2.4.6, 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5, 11.5.2.8
872NameIf the color picker or its control elements have a description, it must be communicated as an Accessible Description.MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5
873OperationIt must be possible to access, operate and exit the color picker and its control elements with assistive technology (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.12, 11.5.2.17
874UpdateUpdates concerning the Accessible Name or status of the color picker and its control elements must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.15
875Desktop: PositionThe size and position of the color picker and its control elements must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 11.5.2.5, 11.5.2.13

Practical tip: color picker in Web applications

HTML

The color picker can be implemented with the HTML element <input type=color>.

The initial value is communicated through the value attribute. Only the hexadecimal color values starting with a diamond and followed by 6 characters are permitted as values.

The label of the color picker should be linked to the color picker with the <label for=ID> element.

The color picker can be marked as disabled, but not as a required field (required) or as read-only (readonly).

Please note: Depending on the browser and screen reader used, the HTML color picker is either not perceptible at all (e.g. JAWS with Chrome and Edge) or only partially perceptible and operable (e.g. NVDA with Chrome, Edge and Firefox). Using the HTML color picker is not recommended, unless the application is only intended to work with a browser and specific assistive technology, and accessibility can be guaranteed in this environment. Otherwise, depending on the requirement, for instance, a button, which opens a modal dialog for the color selection, one or several input fields, a drop-down list, slider or a combination of these elements can be used.

Further information: 4.10.5.1.14 Color state (type=color) - HTML Standard (whatwg.org)

ARIA

There is no role for color pickers in ARIA. Instead, depending on the requirement, for instance, a button which opens a modal dialog for the color selection, one or several input fields, a drop-down list, slider or a combination of these elements can be used.

Online betrachten

Synonyms: Slide show, diashow, image rotator, cover flow, element flow, slider

See also: Accordion, Tabs

A carousel is used for the grouping of blocks of content that can be scrolled through (see DIN EN ISO 9241-161: 8.3).

Several implementation variants are possible, including:

Examples:

Figure: Carousel
No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
876ContrastIf the control elements of the carousel are labeled with text, they must have a contrast ratio of at least 4.5:1.MustEN 301 549: 9.1.4.3, 11.1.4.3
877ContrastIf the control elements of the carousel are labeled with graphics, they must have a contrast ratio of at least 3:1.MustEN 301 549: 9.1.4.11, 11.1.4.11
878ContrastIf, in terms of the pagination, the current page only differs from the rest of the pages due to its color, the colors must have a contrast ratio of at least 3:1.MustEN 301 549: 9.1.4.1, 11.1.4.1
879AnimationIf the content blocks in the carousel are scrolled through automatically, a mechanism must be implemented to stop the automatic scrolling and it must then be possible to scroll through the content blocks manually.MustEN 301 549: 9.2.2.1, 11.2.2.1, 9.2.2.2, 11.2.2.2
880AnimationIf moving animations are displayed during the operation of the carousel, a mechanism should be available to disable them(see ) animations).

Note: This applies to scrolling through the content blocks, for example..

ShouldWCAG 2.1.: 2.3.3 (AAA)
881Focus visibilityIf an element in the carousel receives the keyboard focus, the focus indicator must be visible(see focus indicator).MustEN 301 549: 9.2.4.7, 11.2.4.7
No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
882Use of the keyboardIt must be possible to access, operate and exit the carousel and the elements that it contains with the keyboard (see Use of the keyboard table, below).MustEN 301 549: 9.2.1.1, 11.2.1.1, 9.2.1.2, 11.2.1.2
883Use of the keyboardThe hidden content blocks and their contents must not receive keyboard focus.MustEN 301 549: 9.1.3.1, 11.1.3.1
884UpdatesDuring the focusing of the control elements of the carousel, no change of context may occur.MustEN 301 549: 9.3.2.1, 11.3.2.1
884UpdatesWhen operating the carousel, no loss of focus may occur.

Note: The focus must remain on the respective control element or be placed at the beginning of the shown area.

MustEN 301 549: 9.2.4.3, 11.2.4.3
885Focus orderThe focus order in the carousel should be appropriate to the work task.ShouldDIN EN ISO 9241-171: 9.3.18
886Focus orderIf the carousel contains several control elements that receive the focus with TAB, it should be possible to skip the carousel with the keyboard (see navigation sequence)ShouldDIN EN ISO 9241-171: 9.3.17
887Click areaThe click area of the control elements of the carousel should be at least 24 x 24 px (see use of the pointing device).ShouldWCAG 2.2
ActionKeyClassification
Focusing of the first element in the carouselTABRequired
Exiting the carouselTAB

Note: There can be several control elements within the carousel that have been previously focused with TAB.

Required
Navigating within the carouselTAB or LEFT/RIGHT/UP/DOWN ARROW (depending on the used control element)Required
Quick navigation between the content blocksPOS1, END, PAGE UP/DOWNRecommended
Activating of the control elements in the carouselENTER or SPACE (depending on the used control element)Required
ActionKeyClassification
Enabling of the control elements in the carouselleft clickRequired
No.PropertyDescriptionClassificationReference
888RoleThe role of the control elements in the carousel must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Accessibility API).

Note: If the carousel role is not known in the programming language used, the entire carousel should be located in a labeled group. The label or description of the group should contain a note about the element type of the carousel.

MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5
889StatusThe status of the content blocks and control elements in the carousel must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Element status).

Note: This also applies to the “current content block” status in the carousel or the pagination.

MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5
890NameThe control elements in the carousel must have a concise and expressive Accessible Name.MustEN 301 549: 9.2.4.6, 11.2.4.6, 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5, 11.5.2.8
891NameIf the control elements in the carousel have a description, it must be communicated as an Accessible Description.MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.5
891OperationIt must be possible to access, operate and exit the carousel and its control elements with assistive technology (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.12, 11.5.2.17
892UpdateUpdates concerning the Accessible Name or status of the content blocks and the control elements in the carousel must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Accessibility API).MustEN 301 549: 9.4.1.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.5.2.15
893Desktop: PositionThe size and position of the content blocks and the control elements in the carousel must be communicated to the Accessibility API (see Focus indicator).MustEN 301 549: 11.5.2.5, 11.2.5.13

Annex

Online betrachten

Table of contents

References and sources

Online betrachten

Glossary

Online betrachten

Accessibility

The extent to which products, systems, services, environments and facilities can be used by people from a population with the widest scope of use-related needs, characteristics and skills to be able to achieve identified objectives in identified use contexts (EN 301 549 v3.2.1:2021)

Accessible methods of access include construction and other facilities, methods of transport, technical objects, information processing systems, acoustic and visual information sources and communication devices and other designed areas of life, if they can be found, accessed and used by persons with disabilities in the usual way, without any particular difficulties and in general without assistance from others. In this respect, the use of necessary auxiliaries due to disability is permitted (Section 4 of the BGG).

Accessible Description

Programmatically interpretable characteristic of a UI element that has the purpose of the more detailed description of the UI element for assistive technology

Accessible Name

Name; Programmatically interpretable characteristic of a UI element that has the purpose of the labeling of the UI element for assistive technology

Area navigation

The ability to move from one UI element group to another with the use of the keyboard

Assistive Technology

AT; Product, system, hardware or software which is used to enhance, maintain or improve the functional skills of people (EN 301 549 v3.2.1:2021)

Examples: Screen magnifier, screen reader, text-to-speech software, speech recognition software, alternative keyboards and pointing devices ( assistive technology - Web Content Accessibility Guidelines (WCAG) 2.2 (w3.org) (External Link))(w3.org))

Authoring Tool

Software which can be used to create or edit content (EN 301 549 v3.2.1: 2021)

Captcha

„“Completely Automated Public Turing test to tell Computers and Humans Apart” Program that protects websites from bots by generating and evaluating tests that people are able to pass but current computer programs are not ( Official CAPTCHA page (External Link))

Click area

The area of the user interface which is activated by a pointer device (e.g. a mouse) (DIN EN ISO 9241-161:2016)

Closed functionality

Functionality which is restricted by specific features that prevent the connection, installation or use of assistive technology (EN 301 549 v3.2.1:2021)

Color scheme

Series of color assignments for the presentation of UI elements (DIN EN ISO 9241-171)

Context-sensitive Help

Help text that contains information about the function which is currently being run

Note: Unique labels can be used as context-sensitive help.

Examples:

Continuous text

Also scrolling text or text block; continuous text of an article without a heading, table or equivalent; Text with more than one sentence (WCAG 2.1, Understanding SC 1.4.8)

Contrast ratio

Evaluation of the difference between two immediately adjacent or sequential impressions (luminance contrast, brightness contrast, color contrast, etc.)

Here: Measurement value for the presentation of the maximum relative brightness differences between two colors

Control element

Control, operating element;

UI element with which users are able to interact, such as the keyboard or a pointing device

Examples: Links, buttons, form fields

Custom element

UI element which, in contrast to defined UI elements of the programming language (standard elements), can be created by development teams with full functionality

Description

The detailed labeling for a UI element (input field, display field, a table, a control element or an object)

ENTER key

This refers to both the RETURN and ENTER keys on the numeric keypad

Explicit identifier

Code or abbreviation for a menu item or the label of a control element (usually on the left) which is highlighted next to the name and entered when selected (DIN EN ISO 9241-171:2008)

Flash

A series of two opposing changes in relative luminance. If the changes are big enough and occur at the correct frequency, they pose the risk of triggering seizures in some people. ( general flash and red flash thresholds - Web Content Accessibility Guidelines (WCAG) 2.1 (w3.org) (External Link))

Focus indicator

Position cursor;

Display that shows which UI element has the keyboard focus (DIN EN ISO 9241-171:2008) For example: Keyboard focus indicator: visual display of where the user interaction with the keyboard (or keyboard emulator) will take place (DIN EN ISO 9241-171:2008)

Form

structured presentation of fields and other UI elements that users read, fill out, for which they select or modify entries (DIN EN ISO 9241-161:2016)

Form element

UI element which is used for entering or selecting values in form dialogs (also buttons)

Hard line break

fixed end-of-line marking which is interpreted as a paragraph (pilcrow, symbol: ¶) (automatic line break – Wikipedia)

Hover area

The area of the user interface which responds to an overlying pointer (DIN EN ISO 9241-161:2016)

Hybrid application

Desktop application that uses Web technologies for the presentation of the user interface

Image of text

Text which is rendered in a non-text form (e.g., an image) to achieve a particular visual effect ( image of text - Web Content Accessibility Guidelines (WCAG) 2.1 (w3.org) (External Link))

Implicit identifier

The part of an option name or the label of a control element which is used for a keyboard selection (DIN EN ISO 9241-171:2008)

For example „Print“

Keyboard

here: Keyboard interface;

Interface which is used by the software for the receiving of keystrokes ( keyboard interface - Web Content Accessibility Guidelines (WCAG) 2.1 (w3.org) (External Link))

Keyboard focus

current assignment of the input made on a keyboard or keyboard equivalent to a UI element (DIN EN ISO 9241-171:2008)

Keyboard navigation

The ability to move from one UI element to another within an interactive system with the use of the

Keyboard shortcut

Key shortcut, key combination, keyboard combination, keyboard command, keyboard equivalents, key sequence, access key, hot key, shortcut

Keys and key combinations which provide access to functions that are usually activated by means of a pointing device, voice input, or through other input or control mechanisms

Label

A short designation or heading for a UI element (for example, an input field or display field, a table, a control element or an object) (see also DIN EN ISO 9241-171: 2008)

Navigation

The ability to move from one UI element to another within a single user interface and to move within an interactive system (DIN EN ISO 9241-161:2016)

Non-text content

Content which is not a sequence of letters determinable by software, or in the case of which the sequence does not express anything in human language (EN 301 549 v3.2.1:2021)

Examples:

Open functionality

Functionality which supports the access through assistive technology (EN 301 549 v3.2.1:2021)

Platform software

A collection of software components which is run on an underlying software or hardware layer, and which provides a set of software services to other software components through which these applications can be isolated from the underlying software or hardware layer (EN 301 549 v3.2.1)

Examples: An operating system, device drivers, window systems and software toolkits (DIN EN ISO 9241-161)

Note: A browser can function both as an application and as platform software. (DIN EN ISO 9241-161)

Pointer

Graphical symbol whose position on the screen is changed according to the movement of a pointing device, and whose shape can be adjusted depending on the control element which is situated beneath it (DIN EN ISO 9241-171:2008)

Pointing device

Pointing instrument;

An auxiliary which converts an operational step of the user into a step that is displayed on the screen

Note: Depending on the technology used, both mechanical auxiliary products and parts of the human body (e.g. fingers, arms) can be used as pointing devices. (DIN EN ISO 9241-171:2008)

Quick navigation

Keyboard navigation in which navigation steps are skipped to enable the efficient operation

Real-time event

An event that a) occurs at the same time as it is viewed, and b) is not entirely generated by the content

For example: “Web cast” of a live performance, online auction (real-time event (Web Content Accessibility Guidelines (WCAG) 2.0) (w3.org))

Role

UI element type for user interfaces;

Characteristic which serves as a known identifier, indicating the type of UI element;

Client applications, especially assistive technology, use the characteristic in order to identify the functions of a control element and to determine how to interact with it

Screen magnifier

Assistive technology for the individualizing of the visual display

Frequent functions are:

Screen reader

Assistive technology which enables users to use software without having to see the visual display (DIN EN ISO 9241-171:2008)

The UI elements are output acoustically by speakers or headphones and on a tactile basis with the use of a Braille display.

The input and control takes place with the keyboard or the Braille display. The inputs are initially processed by the screen reader before being forwarded to the user interface.

Shortcut key

Mnemonic, menu accelerator, accelerator key, shortcut keys

Keys and combinations of keys for initializing a menu option without displaying the corresponding menu with the option or intermediate menus on the screen

For example: Save (ALT + S)

An internal page link to skip areas of content during the keyboard navigation

Speech recognition software

Assistive technology for the input of text (dictation) or control commands for the running of control elements

An alternative method of input for the mouse or keyboard interface

Standard element

UI elements that are defined by the programming language by default

Status

State;

dynamic characteristic which expresses the characteristics of a UI element which is able to change in response to actions by the user or automated processes

The status does not affect the nature of the UI element, but represents data which is assigned to the component or user interaction capabilities

Examples: focused, selected, pressed, highlighted, operable/disabled, correct/incorrect and open/closed, read-only

Status message

Change in content which is not a change in context, and provides users with information about the success or outcome of an action, the waiting state of an application, the progress of a process, or the presence of errors ( status message - Web Content Accessibility Guidelines (WCAG) 2.2 (w3.org) (External Link))

Support services

Support services include, but are not limited to: Help desks, call centers, technical support, mediation services and training (see also EN 301 549: 12.2.1)

Text cursor

Text indicator;

visual display of the current cursor for the text input (DIN EN ISO 9241-171:2008)

UI

All components of an interactive system (software or hardware) that provide users with information and control elements in order to be able to perform specific work tasks with the interactive system (DIN EN ISO 9241-171:2008)

UI element

User interface element

User interface element; elementary component of the user interface which is displayed or otherwise presented to the users by the software (DIN EN ISO 9241-171:2008)

User agent

Software which retrieves and displays content for users (EN 301 549 v3.2.1:2021)

User preferences

Individualization, customization;

The modification of the interaction and the presentation of information in order to respond to the individual abilities and requirements of the user (DIN EN ISO 9241-171:2008)

Value

Form elements have a value which is communicated when the form is submitted. In an input field, the value is the entered text. In a selection list, the value is the selected option.

Virtual cursor

The virtual cursor is a mode of the screen reader. It is used, for example, in order to read Web pages in a Web browser (unless they are marked with role=application), PDF documents in a PDF reader, or content in hybrid desktop software. Although it is not visible like the mouse cursor, the virtual cursor simulates an insertion point, and offers the same functionality as when reading a text-based document.

Annex

Online betrachten

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

N

O

P

Q

R

S

T

U

W

V

Z

Informationen zu diesem Dokument

Diese Handreichung hat die Version 1.0 und wurde am 28.05.2026 erstellt.

Allgemeine Informationspflichten gemäß § 5 Telemediengesetz und § 55 Rundfunkstaatsvertrag

Die Deutsche Rentenversicherung Knappschaft-Bahn-See ist eine rechtsfähige Körperschaft des öffentlichen Rechts mit Selbstverwaltung und besitzt Dienstherrnfähigkeit (§ 29 SGB IV in Verbindung mit § 143 Abs. 1 SGB VI).

Dieses Impressum gilt für dieses Dokument der Arbeitsgruppen des Ausschusses für barrierefreie Informationstechnik nach § 5 BITV 2.0. Die Arbeitsgruppen werden von der Überwachungsstelle des Bundes für Barrierefreiheit von Informationstechnik organisiert.

Herausgeber

Deutsche Rentenversicherung Knappschaft-Bahn-See
Pieperstraße 14 - 28
44789 Bochum
Tel. 0234 304 - 0
Fax 0234 304 - 66050
E-Mail an die Zentrale der KBS: zentrale@kbs.de

Umsatzsteuer-Identifikationsnummer: DE 124089627

Dieses Dokument wird herausgegeben von der Deutschen Rentenversicherung Knappschaft-Bahn-See, vertreten durch die Geschäftsführung, Dr. Rainer Wilhelm.

Zuständige Fachaufsichtsbehörde für die Überwachungsstelle des Bundes für Barrierefreiheit von Informationstechnik

Bundesministerium für Arbeit und Soziales
Wilhelmstraße 49
10117 Berlin

Nutzungsbedingungen

Die Inhalte dieser Handreichung werden mit größtmöglicher Sorgfalt verfasst. Unser Anspruch ist es, richtige, vollständige und aktuelle Inhalte bereitzustellen. Wir übernehmen dennoch keine Gewähr für versehentlich gemachte falsche Angaben.

Diese Handreichung enthält Verknüpfungen zu Webauftritten Dritter (“externe Links”). Wir haben bei der erstmaligen Verknüpfung zu externen Links die fremden Inhalte daraufhin überprüft, ob etwaige Rechtsverstöße bestehen. Zu diesem Zeitpunkt haben wir keine Rechtsverstöße vorgefunden. Wir haben jedoch weder Einfluss auf die aktuelle und zukünftige Gestaltung der verknüpften Seiten noch auf deren Inhalte oder Angebote. Sollten uns Rechtsverstöße bekannt werden, löschen wir die betreffenden externen Links unverzüglich. Bitte weisen Sie uns gegebenenfalls darauf hin.